+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Quantum Lecture Notes

Quantum Lecture Notes

Date post: 10-Apr-2018
Category:
Upload: maryam-taba
View: 219 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
375
LECTURE NOTES ON QUANTUM MECHANICS Dr. Shun-Qing Shen Department of Physics The University of Hong Kong September 2004
Transcript
Page 1: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 1/374

LECTURE NOTES

ON QUANTUM MECHANICS

Dr. Shun-Qing Shen

Department of Physics

The University of Hong Kong

September 2004

Page 2: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 2/374

CT Contents

0.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

1 Fundamental Concepts 1

1.1 Relation between experimental interpretations and theoretical inferences 2

1.1.1 Experimental facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1.2 Theoretical development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.2 Materials from Britannica Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.2.1 Photoelectric eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.2.2 Frank-Hertz experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.2.3 Compton eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.3 The Stern-Gerlach Experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1.3.1 The Stern-Gerlach experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

1.3.2 Sequential Stern-Gerlach Experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

1.3.3 Analogy with Polarization of Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

ii

Page 3: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 3/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

1.4 Dirac Notation and Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.5 Base kets and Matrix Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.5.1 Eigenkets of an Observable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.5.2 Eigenkets as Base kets: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1.5.3 Matrix Representation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1.6 Measurements, Observables & The Uncertainty Relation . . . . . . . . 26

1.6.1 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1.6.2 Spin1/2 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

1.6.3 Probability Postulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

1.6.4 S and S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

1.6.5 The Algebra of Spin Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

1.6.6 Algebra of the Pauli matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

1.6.7 Observable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

1.7 Change of Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

1.7.1 Transformation Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

1.7.2 Transformation Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

1.7.3 Diagonalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

1.8 Position, Momentum, and Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1.8.1 Continuous Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1.8.2 Some properties of the −function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

iii

Page 4: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 4/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

1.8.3 Position Eigenkets and Position Measurements . . . . . . . . . . 45

1.8.4 Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

1.9 The Uncertainty Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2 Quantum Dynamics 62

2.1 Time Evolution and the Schrödinger Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622.1.1 Time Evolution Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

2.1.2 The Schrödinger Equation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

2.1.3 Time Dependence of Expectation Value: Spin Precession. . . . . 69

2.2 The Schrodinger versus the Heisenberg Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

2.2.1 Unitary operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

2.2.2 Two Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

2.2.3 The Heisenberg Equation of Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

2.2.4 How to construct a Hamiltonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

2.3 Simple Harmonic Oscillator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

2.3.1 Eigenvalue and eigenstates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

2.3.2 Time Development of the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

2.3.3 The Coherent State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

2.4 Schrodinger Wave Equation: Simple Harmonic Oscillator . . . . . . . . 89

2.5 Propagators and Feynman Path Integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

2.5.1 Propagators in Wave Mechanics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

iv

Page 5: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 5/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

2.5.2 Propagator as a Transition Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

2.5.3 Path Integral as the Sum Over Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

2.5.4 Feynman’s Formalism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

2.6 The Gauge Transformation and Phase of Wave Function . . . . . . . . 102

2.6.1 Constant Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

2.6.2 Gauge Transformation in Electromagnetism . . . . . . . . . . . 105

2.6.3 The Gauge Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

2.6.4 The Aharonov-Bohm Eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

2.6.5 Magnetic Monopole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

2.7 Interpretation of Wave Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

2.7.1 What’s Ψ()? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

2.7.2 The Classical Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

2.8 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

2.8.1 One dimensional square well potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

2.8.2 A charged particle in a uniform magnetic field . . . . . . . . . . 125

3 Theory of Angular Momentum 128

3.1 Rotation and Angular Momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

3.1.1 Finite versus infinitesimal rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

3.1.2 Orbital angular momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

3.1.3 Rotation operator for spin 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

v

Page 6: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 6/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

3.1.4 Spin precession revisited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

3.2 Rotation Group and the Euler Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

3.2.1 The Group Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

3.2.2 Orthogonal Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

3.2.3 “Special”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

3.2.4 Unitary Unimodular Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

3.2.5 Euler Rotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

3.3 Eigenvalues and Eigenkets of Angular Momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

3.3.1 Representation of Rotation Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

3.4 Schwinger Oscillator Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

3.4.1 Spin 1/2 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

3.4.2 Two-spin—1/2 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

3.4.3 Explicit Formula for Rotation Matrices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

3.5 Combination of Angular Momentum and Clebsh-Gordan Coefficients . 167

3.5.1 Clebsch-Gordan coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

3.6 Spin Correlation Measurements and Bell’s Inequality . . . . . . . . . . 176

3.6.1 Spin singlet state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

3.6.2 Einstein’s Locality Principle and Bell’s inequality . . . . . . . . 177

3.6.3 Quantum Mechanics and Bell’s Inequality . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

3.7 PROBLEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

vi

Page 7: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 7/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

4 Symmetries in Physics 183

4.1 Symmetries and Conservation Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

4.1.1 Symmetry in Classical Physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

4.1.2 Symmetry in Quantum Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

4.1.3 Degeneracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

4.1.4 Symmetry and symmetry breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

4.1.5 Summary: symmetries in physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

4.2 Discrete Symmetries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

4.2.1 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

4.2.2 The Momentum Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

4.2.3 The Angular Momentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

4.2.4 Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

4.2.5 Lattice Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

4.2.6 A more realistic example: a 1D system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

4.3 Permutation Symmetry and Identical Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

4.3.1 Identical particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

4.3.2 Two electrons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

4.3.3 The helium atom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

4.4 Time Reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

4.4.1 Classical cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

vii

Page 8: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 8/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

4.4.2 Time reversal operator Θ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

4.4.3 Time reversal for a spin 1/2 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

5 Approximation Methods for Bound States 217

5.1 The Variation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

5.1.1 Expectation value of the energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2185.1.2 Particle in a one-dimensional infinite square well . . . . . . . . . 220

5.1.3 Ground State of Helium Atom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

5.2 Stationary Perturbation Theory: Nondegenerate Case . . . . . . . . . . 223

5.2.1 Statement of the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

5.2.2 The Two-State Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

5.2.3 Formal Development of Perturbation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

5.3 Application of the Perturbation Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

5.3.1 Simple harmonic oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

5.3.2 Atomic hydrogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

5.3.3 Quantum well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

5.4 Stationary Perturbation Theory: Degenerate Case . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

5.4.1 Revisited two-state problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

5.4.2 The basic procedure of degenerate perturbation theory . . . . . 239

5.4.3 Example: Zeeman Eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

5.4.4 Spin-Orbit interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

viii

Page 9: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 9/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

5.4.5 Example: First Order Stark Eff ect in Hydrogen . . . . . . . . . 244

5.5 The Wentzel-Kramers-Brillouin (WKB) approximation . . . . . . . . . 247

5.6 Time-dependent Problem: Interacting Picture and Two-State Problem 247

5.6.1 Time-dependent Potential and Interacting Picture . . . . . . . . 247

5.6.2 Time-dependent Two-State Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

5.7 Time-dependent Perturbation Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

5.7.1 Perturbation Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

5.7.2 Time-independent perturbation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

5.7.3 Harmonic perturbation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

5.7.4 The Golden Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

6 Collision Theory 260

6.1 Collisions in one- and three-dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

6.1.1 One-dimensional square potential barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

6.1.2 Datta-Das spin field transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

6.2 Collision in three dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

6.3 Scattering by Spherically Symmetric Potentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

6.4 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

6.4.1 Scattering by a square well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

6.4.2 Scattering by a hard-sphere potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

6.4.3 Identical Particles and Scattering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

ix

Page 10: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 10/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

6.5 Applications to interactions with the classical field . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

6.5.1 Absorption and stimulation emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

6.5.2 Electric dipole approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

6.5.3 Photoelectric eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

6.6 Approximate Collision Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

6.6.1 The Lippman-Schwinger Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

6.6.2 The Born Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

6.6.3 The higher-order Born approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

6.6.4 Optical Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

6.6.5 Application: from Yukawa potential to Coloumb potential . . . 294

7 Selected Topics 296

7.1 Relativistic Quantum Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

7.1.1 The Schrodinger Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

7.1.2 Dirac Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

7.1.3 Spin of Dirac particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

7.1.4 The Zeeman coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

7.1.5 Exact solution in Coloumb potential: Hydrogen atom . . . . . . 304

7.1.6 Spin-orbit coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

7.1.7 Spin-orbital coupling and spintronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

7.1.8 Spin transverse force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

x

Page 11: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 11/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

7.1.9 Spin-orbit coupling and Datta-Das field-eff ect transistor . . . . . 306

7.1.10 Graphene: 2D massless Dirac quasi-particles . . . . . . . . . . . 306

7.1.11 Topological Insulator and Dirac particels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

7.2 Quantum Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

7.2.1 Density Operator and Ensembles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

7.2.2 Quantum Statistical Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

7.2.3 Quantum Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

7.2.4 Systems of non-interaction particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

7.2.5 Bose-Einstein Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

7.2.6 Free fermion gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

7.3 Quantum Hall Eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

7.3.1 Hall Eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

7.3.2 Quantum Hall Eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

7.3.3 Laughlin’s Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

7.3.4 Charged particle in the presence of a magnetic field . . . . . . . 342

7.3.5 Landau Level and Quantum Hall Eff ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

7.4 Quantum Magnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

7.4.1 Spin Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

7.4.2 Two-Site Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

7.4.3 Ferromagnetic Exchange ( 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

xi

Page 12: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 12/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

7.4.4 Antiferromagnetic Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

A 0.1 General Information

New Course Code: PHYS6504

• Aim/Following-up: The course provides an introduction to advanced tech-

niques in quantum mechanics and their application to several selected topics in

condensed matter physics.

• Contents: Dirac notation and formalism, time evolution of quantum systems,

angular momentum theory, creation and annihilation operators (the second quan-

tization representation), symmetries and conservation laws, permutation symme-

try and identical particles, quantum statistics, non-degenerate and degenerate

perturbation theory, time-dependent perturbation theory, the variational method

• Prerequisites: PHYS2323 and PHYS3332 or equivalent

• Co-requisite: Nil

• Teaching: 36 hours of lectures and tutorial classes

• Duration: One semester (1st semester)

• Assessment: One three-hour examination (70%) and course assessment (30%)

xii

Page 13: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 13/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

• Textbook: J. J. Sakurai, Modern Quantum Mechanics (Addison-Wesley, 1994)

• Web page: http://bohr.physics.hku.hk/~phys6504/ All lectures notes in pdf

files can be download from the site.

• References: L. Schiff , Quantum Mechanics (McGraw-Hill, 1968, 3nd ed.); Richard

Feynman, Robert B. Leighton, and Matthew L. Sands, Feynman Lectures on

Physics Vol. III, (Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., 1965); L. D. Landau and E.

M. Lifshitz, Quantum Mechanics

• Time and Venue:

14:00 -15:55: Tuesday/CYP-105

14:00 -14:55: Thursday/MW-714

xiii

Page 14: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 14/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

Numerical values of some physical quantities

xiv

Page 15: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 15/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

~ = 1054 × 10−27erg-sec (Planck’s constant divided by 2

= 480 × 10−10 esu (magnitude of electron charge)

= 0911 × 10−27g (electron mass)

= 1672 × 10−24g (proton mass)

0 = ~ 22 = 529 × 10−9 cm (Bohr radius)

20 = 272eV (twice binding energy of hydrogen)

= 300 × 1010

cm/sec (speed of light)

~ 2 = 137 (reciprocal fine structure constant)

~ 2 = 0927 × 10−20erg/oersted (Bohr magneton)

2 = 0511MeV (electron rest energy)

2 = 938MeV (proton rest energy)

1eV = 1602 × 10−12erg

1 eV/c = 12 400Å

1eV = 11 600K

xv

Page 16: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 16/374

CONTENTS – MANUSCRIPT

xvi

Page 17: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 17/374

CN Chapter 1

CT Fundamental Concepts

At the present stage of human knowledge, quantum mechanics can be regarded as the

fundamental theory of atomic phenomena. The experimental data on which it is based

are derived from physical events that almost entirely beyond the range of direct human

perception. It is not surprising that the theory embodies physical concepts that are

foreign to common daily experience.

The most traditional way to introduce the quantum mechanics is to follow the

historical development of theory and experiment — Planck’s radiation law, the Einstein-

Debye’s theory of specific heat, the Bohr atom, de Broglie’s matter wave and so forth

— together with careful analysis of some experiments such as diff raction experiment

of light, the Compton eff ect, and Franck-Hertz eff ect. In this way we can enjoy the

experience of physicists of last century to establish the theory. In this course we do not

1

Page 18: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 18/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

follow the historical approach. Instead, we start with an example that illustrates the

inadequacy of classical concepts in a fundamental way.

A 1.1 Relation between experimental interpretations

and theoretical inferences

Schiff ’s book has a good introduction to this theory. Here we just list several experi-

ments which played key roles in development of quantum theory.

B 1.1.1 Experimental facts

• Electromagnetic wave/light: Diff raction (Young, 1803; Laue, 1912))

• Electromagnetic quanta /light: Black body radiation (Planck, 1900); Photoelec-

tric eff ect (Einstein, 1904); Compton eff ect (1923); Combination Principle (Rita-

Rydberg, 1908)

• Discrete values for physical quantities: Specific heat (Einstein 1907, Debye 1912);

Franck-Hertz experiment (1913); Stern-Gerlach experiment (1922)

B 1.1.2 Theoretical development

• Maxwell’s theory for electromagnetism: Electromagnetic wave (1864)

2

Page 19: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 19/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

• Planck’s theory for black body radiation: = ~ : Electromagnetic quanta (1900)

• de Broglie’s theory: = : Wave-Particle Duality, (1924)

• Bohr’s atom model, (1913)

• Birth of quantum mechanics: Heisenberg’s theory (1926); Schrodinger’s theory

(1926)

A 1.2 Materials from Britannica Online

B 1.2.1 Photoelectric eff ect

The phenomenon in which charge particles are released from a material when it absorbs

radiant energy. The photoelectric eff ect commonly is thought of as the ejection of

electrons from the surface of a metal plate when light falls on it. In the broad sense,

however, the phenomenon can take place when the radiant energy is in the region of

visible or ultraviolet light, X rays, or gamma rays; when the material is a solid, liquid, or

gas; and when the particles released are electrons or ions (charged atoms or molecules).

The photoelectric eff ect was discovered in 1887 by a German physicist, Hein-

rich Rudolf Hertz, who observed that ultraviolet light changes the lowest voltage at

which sparking takes place between given metallic electrodes. At the close of the 19th

century, it was established that a cathode ray (produced by an electric discharge in a

3

Page 20: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 20/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 1.1:

rarefied-gas atmosphere) consists of discrete particles, called electrons, each bearing an

elementary negative charge. In 1900 Philipp Lenard, a German physicist, studying the

electrical charges liberated from a metal surface when it was illuminated, concluded

that these charges were identical to the electrons observed in cathode rays. It was fur-

ther discovered that the current (given the name photoelectric because it was caused

by light rays), made up of electrons released from the metal, is proportional to the

intensity of the light causing it for any fixed wavelength of light that is used. In 1902 it

was proved that the maximum kinetic energy of an electron in the photoelectric eff ect

is independent of the intensity of the light ray and depends on its frequency.

The observations that (1) the number of electrons released in the photoelec-

tric eff ect is proportional to the intensity of the light and that (2) the frequency, or

4

Page 21: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 21/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

wavelength, of light determines the maximum kinetic energy of the electrons indicated

a kind of interaction between light and matter that could not be explained in terms of

classical physics. The search for an explanation led in 1905 to Albert Einstein’s funda-

mental theory that light, long thought to be wavelike, can be regarded alternatively as

composed of discrete particles (now called photons ), equivalent to energy quanta.

In explaining the photoelectric eff ect, Einstein assumed that a photon could

penetrate matter, where it would collide with an atom. Since all atoms have electrons,

an electron would be ejected from the atom by the energy of the photon, with great

velocity. The kinetic energy of the electron, as it moved through the atoms of the

matter, would be diminished at each encounter. Should it reach the surface of the

material, the kinetic energy of the electron would be further reduced as the electron

overcame and escaped the attraction of the surface atoms. This loss in kinetic energy is

called the work function, symbolized by omega (). According to Einstein, each light

quantum consists of an amount of energy equal to the product of Planck’s universal

constant () and the frequency of the light (indicated by the Greek ). Einstein’s theory

of the photoelectric eff ect postulates that the maximum kinetic energy of the electrons

ejected from a material is equal to the frequency of the incident light times Planck’s

constant, less the work function. The resulting photoelectric equation of Einstein can

be expressed by = −, in which is the maximum kinetic energy of the ejected

electron, is a constant, later shown to be numerically the same as Planck’s constant,

5

Page 22: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 22/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

is the frequency of the incident light, and is the work function.

The kinetic energy of an emitted electron can be measured by placing it in an

electric field and measuring the potential or voltage diff erence (indicated as V) required

to reduce its velocity to zero. This energy is equal to the product of the potential

diff erence and an electron’s charge, which is always a constant and is indicated by ;

thus, = .

The validity of the Einstein relationship was examined by many investigators

and found to be correct but not complete. In particular, it failed to account for the fact

that the emitted electron’s energy is influenced by the temperature of the solid. The

remedy to this defect was first formulated in 1931 by a British mathematician, Ralph

Howard Fowler, who, on the assumption that all electrons with energies greater than

the work function would escape, established a relationship between the photoelectric

current and the temperature: the current is proportional to the product of the square

of the temperature and a function of the incident photon’s energy. The equation is

= 2(), in which is the photoelectric current, and are constants, and ()

is an exponential series, whose numerical values have been tabulated; the dimensionless

value equals the kinetic energy of the emitted electrons divided by the product of the

temperature and the Boltzmann constant of the kinetic theory: = ( − ) ; in

which is the argument of the exponential series.

6

Page 23: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 23/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

B 1.2.2 Frank-Hertz experiment

in physics, first experimental verification of the existence of discrete energy states in

atoms, performed (1914) by the German-born physicists James Franck and Gustav

Hertz .

Franck and Hertz directed low-energy electrons through a gas enclosed in an

electron tube. As the energy of the electrons was slowly increased, a certain critical

electron energy was reached at which the electron stream made a change from almost

undisturbed passage through the gas to nearly complete stoppage. The gas atoms were

able to absorb the energy of the electrons only when it reached a certain critical value,

indicating that within the gas atoms themselves the atomic electrons make an abrupt

transition to a discrete higher energy level. As long as the bombarding electrons have

less than this discrete amount of energy, no transition is possible and no energy is

absorbed from the stream of electrons. When they have this precise energy, they lose it

all at once in collisions to atomic electrons, which store the energy by being promoted

to a higher energy level.

B 1.2.3 Compton eff ect

increase in wavelength of X rays and other energetic electromagnetic radiations that

have been elastically scattered by electrons; it is a principal way in which radiant energy

is absorbed in matter. The eff ect has proved to be one of the cornerstones of quantum

7

Page 24: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 24/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 1.2:

8

Page 25: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 25/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

mechanics, which accounts for both wave and particle properties of radiation as well as

of matter.

The American physicist Arthur Holly Compton explained (1922; published

1923) the wavelength increase by considering X rays as composed of discrete pulses,

or quanta, of electromagnetic energy, which he called photons. Photons have energy

and momentum just as material particles do; they also have wave characteristics, such

as wavelength and frequency. The energy of photons is directly proportional to their

frequency and inversely proportional to their wavelength, so lower-energy photons have

lower frequencies and longer wavelengths. In the Compton eff ect, individual photons

collide with single electrons that are free or quite loosely bound in the atoms of matter.

Colliding photons transfer some of their energy and momentum to the electrons, which

in turn recoil. In the instant of the collision, new photons of less energy and momentum

are produced that scatter at angles the size of which depends on the amount of energy

lost to the recoiling electrons.

Because of the relation between energy and wavelength, the scattered photons

have a longer wavelength that also depends on the size of the angle through which the X

rays were diverted. The increase in wavelength or Compton shift does not depend on the

wavelength of the incident photon. The Compton eff ect was discovered independently

by the physical chemist Peter Debye in early 1923.

∆ =

(1 − cos )

9

Page 26: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 26/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 1.3:

10

Page 27: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 27/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 1.4: The Stern-Gerlach Experiment

0 = = 242631058 × 10−

12

m = 0024˚

A 1.3 The Stern-Gerlach Experiment

We start with the Stern-Gerlach experiment to introduce some basic concepts of quan-

tum mechanics. The two-state problem can be regarded as the most quantum. A lot of

important discoveries are related to it. It is worthy studying very carefully. We shall

repeat to discuss the problem throughout this course.

11

Page 28: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 28/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

B 1.3.1 The Stern-Gerlach experiment

Oven: silver atoms (Ag) are heated in the oven. The oven has a small hole through

which some of the silver atoms escape to form an atomic beam.

Ag: (Electron configuration: 1s22s22p63s23p63d104s24p64d105s1). The outer

shell has only ONE electron (5s1) . The atom has an angular momentum., which is due

solely to the spin of 47 electron.

Collimating slit: change the diverging Ag beam to a parallel beam.

Shaped Magnet: N and S are north and south poles of a magnet. The knife-

edge of S results in a much stronger magnetic field at the point P than Q . i.e. the

magnet generates an inhomogeneous magnetic field.

Role of the inhomogeneous field: to change the direction of the Ag beam. The

interaction energy is = − · B The force experienced by the atoms is

=

( · B) ≈

If the magnetic field is uniform , i.e.

= 0, the Ag beam will not change its direction.

In the field diff erent magnetic moments experience diff erent forces, and the atoms with

diff erent magnetic moments will change diff erent angles after the beams pass through

the shaped magnet. Suppose the length of the shaped magnet . It takes a time

12

Page 29: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 29/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 1.5: Beam from the Stern-Gerlach apparatus: (a) is expected from classical

physics, while (b) is actually observed experimentally.

for particles to go though the magnets. The angle is about

=

=

2=

2 ∝

They will reach at diff erent places on the screen.

Classically: all values of = cos (0 ) would be expected to realize

between || and−

|| It has a continuous distribution.

Experimentally: only two values of z component of are observed (electron

spin ∝ )

Consequence: the spin of electron has two discrete values along the magnetic

13

Page 30: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 30/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

field

=

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩~ 2

−~ 2

~ = 10546 × 10−27erg.s = 65822 × 10−16eV.s

− − − − Planck’s constant divided by 2

It should be noted that the constant cannot be determined accurately from this exper-

iment.

B 1.3.2 Sequential Stern-Gerlach Experiment

SGz stands for an apparatus with inhomogeneous magnetic field in z direction, and

SGx in x direction

Case(a): no surprising!

Case(b): + beam is made up of 50% + and 50% −? − beam?

( +) → 12

( +) + 12

( −)?

( −) → 12

( +) + 12

( −)?

Case(c): Since − is blocked at the first step, why is + beam made up of

both + and − beams?

( +) → 12

( +) + 12

( −)?

( −) → 12

( +) + 12

( −)?

14

Page 31: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 31/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 1.6: Sequential Stern-Gerlach experiment

15

Page 32: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 32/374

Page 33: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 33/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 1.7:

17

Page 34: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 34/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

mathematics of vector spaces as used in quantum mechanics. The theory of linear

algebra has been known to mathematician before the birth of quantum mechanics, but

the Dirac notation has many advantages. At the early time of quantum mechanics

this notation was used to unify Heisenberg’s matrix mechanics and Schrodinger’s wave

mechanics. The notation in this course was first introduced by P. A. M. Dirac.

Ket space: In quantum mechanics, a physical state, for example, a silver

atom with definite spin orientation, is represented by a state vector in a complex vector

space, denoted by |i, a ket. The state ket is postulated to contain complete informa-

tion about physical state. The dimensionality of a complex vector space is specified

according to the nature of physical system under consideration.

An observable can be represented by an operator A

A(|i) = A |i

Eigenket and eigenvalue:

A(|i) = |i

Eigenstate: the physical state corresponding to an eigenket, |i.

Two kets can be added to form a new ket: |i + | i = | i

One of the postulates is that |i and |i with the number 6= 0 represent

the same physical state.

18

Page 35: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 35/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Bra space: a dual correspondence to a ket space. We postulate that corre-

sponding to every ket there exist a bra. The names come from the word “bracket” →

“bra-c-ket”.

1. There exists a one-to one correspondence between a ket space and a bra space.

|i ⇐⇒ h|

2. The bra dual to |i (c is a complex number)

|i ⇐⇒ ∗ h|

Inner product: In general, this product is a complex number.

h |i = (h |) · (|i)

Two properties of the inner product:

1. h |i and h| i are complex conjugates of each other.

h |i = (h| i)∗

2. the postulate of positive definite metric.

h|i ≥ 0

19

Page 36: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 36/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

where the equality sign holds only if |i is a null ket. From a physicist’s point

of view this postulate is essential for the probabilistic interpretation of quantum

mechanics. Question: what happens if we postulate h|i ≤ 0?

Orthogonality:

h| i = 0

Normalization: all vectors can be normalized!

|i =

µ1

h|i

¶12

|i , h|i = 1

The norm of |i : (h|i)12

Operator: an operator acts on a ket from the left side, x |i and the result-

ing product is another ket. An operator acts on a bra from the right side, h|xand

the resulting product is another bra.

• — Equality: x = y if x |i = y |i for an arbitrary ket

— Null operator: x |i = 0 for arbitrary |i

— Hermitian operator: x = x†

— x |i ←→ h|x†

Multiplication

• — Noncommutative: xy 6= yx

20

Page 37: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 37/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

— Associative: x(yz) = (xy)z = xyz

— Hermitian adjoint: (xy)†= y†x† (Prove it!)

y |i ⇒ h|y†

xy |i = x (y |i) ⇒ ¡h|y†

¢x† = h|y†x†

Outer product: |i h | is an operator!

The associative axiom of multiplication: the associative property holds as long

as we are dealing with “legal” multiplications among kets, bras, and operators.

1. (|i h |) · | i = |i (h | | i) ;

2. (h |) · (x |i) = (h |x) · (|i) ≡ h |x| i ;

3. h |x| i = h | · (x |i) = (h|x†) · | i∗ ≡ -¯x†¯

®∗

A 1.5 Base kets and Matrix Representation

B 1.5.1 Eigenkets of an Observable

The operators for observables must be Hermitian as physical quantities must be real.

1). The eigenvalues of a Hermitian operator A are real.

21

Page 38: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 38/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

G Proof. First, we recall the definitions

A |i = |i ⇐⇒ h|A† = h| ∗

h|A |i = ⇔ h|A† |i = ∗

If A = A† =⇒ = ∗

2). The eigenkets of Hermitian A corresponding to diff erent eigenvalues are

orthogonal.

G Proof.

A |i = |i =

⇒h0 |A| i = h0|i

h0|A† = h0| 0 =⇒ h0 |A| i = 0 h0|i

We have

( − 0) h0|i = 0 =⇒ h0|i = 0

It is conventional to normalize all eigenkets |0i of A so that |0i form an orthogonal

set: h”|0i = 000 =

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

1 if 0 = 00

0 otherwise

B 1.5.2 Eigenkets as Base kets:

1. All normalized eigenkets of an observable A form a complete and orthonormal

set. ¯()®. The number of the eigenkets is equal to the dimensionality of the

22

Page 39: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 39/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

complex vector space.

2. An arbitrary ket in the ket space can be expanded in terms of the eigenkets of A:

|i =P

¯()

®=⇒ -

()|®

=

|i = P ¯()® -()|® = µP ¯

()® -()¯¶ |i

3. The completeness relation (or closure):

P

¯()

® -()

¯= 1

(1 means the identity operator. For an arbitary ket |i 1 |i = |i)

(P

¯()® -()¯)(P

¯()® -() ¯)=

P

¯()

® -()

¯()

® -()

¯=P

¯()

®

-()

¯

=P

¯()

® -()

¯=⇒ (

P

¯()

® -()

¯)(P

¯()

® -()

¯− 1) = 0

This relation is very essential to develop the general formalism of quantum me-

chanics.

4. Projection operator: =¯()

® -()

¯

|i =¯()

® -()

¯i =

¯()

®

23

Page 40: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 40/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

selects that portion of the ket |i parallel to¯()

®: · = such that

’s eigenvalues are either 1 or 0.

· = (¯()

® -()

¯)(¯()

® -()

¯)

=

¯()

®-

()|()

®-

()

¯=

¯()

® -()

¯=

B 1.5.3 Matrix Representation:

Having specified the base kets, we show how to represent an operator, say X, by a

square matrix.

X = (P

¯()

® -()

¯)X(

P

¯()

® -()

¯)

=P

¯()

® -()

¯X¯()

® -()

¯

=P

(-

()¯X¯()

®)¯()

® -()

¯=P

¯()

® -()

¯

Let us assume that-

()¯

= (0 · · · 0 1 · · · )

24

Page 41: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 41/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

and

¯()

®=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0

...

0

1

...

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

Thus the outer product of -

()¯

and¯()

®gives a new operator in the form of square

matrix,

¯()

®-

()

¯=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 · · · 0 · · ·

.... . .

......

0 · · · 1 · · ·

......

.... . .

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

The inner product-

()¯

()®

= 1 Thus X can be expressed in a matrix form,

X =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

-(1)

¯X¯(1)

® -(1)

¯X¯(2)

®· · ·

-(2)

¯X¯(1)

® -(2)

¯X¯(2)

®· · ·

......

. . .

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

For an operator A which eigenstates are¯()

®

A =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

(1) 0 · · ·

0 (2) · · ·

......

. . .

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

Basic Matrix Operations:

25

Page 42: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 42/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

1. Transpose: C = A =⇒ =

2. Addition: C = A + B =⇒ = +

3. Scalar-matrix multiplication: C = A =⇒ =

4. Matrix-matrix multiplication: C = AB =⇒ =

P=1

·

A 1.6 Measurements, Observables & The Uncertainty

Relation

B 1.6.1 Measurements

“Measurement” has special meaning in quantum mechanics. It is a physical operation

procedure, and is quite diff erent from that in classical physics. In the classic case the

measurement reflects the state of an object, such as position, velocity, and energy.

The process of measurement does not change the state of the object. For instance we

measure your body height, which does not change your body height. In the quantum

case the process of measurement changes the state of the object. If we want to measure

the spin state of electron we have to let electron go through the Stern-Gerlach apparatus

(of course we have other methods.). The magnetic field changes the spin state, and

select one of the eigenstates along the direction of the magnetic field. This is not a

particularly easy subject for a beginner. Let us first read the words of the great master,

26

Page 43: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 43/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

P. A. M. Dirac, for guidance.

“A measurement always causes the system to jump into an eigenstate of the

dynamic variable that is being measured .”

–P.A.M. Dirac

Interpretation word by word:

1. Before the measurement of observable A is made, the system is assumed to be

represented by some linear combination of the eigenstates

|i = (P

¯()

® -()

¯i =

P

¯()

®

2. When the measurement is performed, the system is “thrown into” one of the

eigenstates, say ¯(1)® of the observable

|i A measurement−−−−−−−−−−−→¯(1)

®

3. A measurement usually changes the state. When the measurement causes |i to

change into¯(1)

®it is said that A is measured to be (1) !

Before the measurement the system is in |i ; after a measurement the system

is in ¯(1)

®

B 1.6.2 Spin1/2 system

We are ready to derive the spin 1/2 operator we encountered in the Stern-Gerlach

experiment. The eigenvalues of S are ±~ 2. We denote the corresponding eigenkets

27

Page 44: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 44/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

as |+i and |−i, respectively,

h+|+i ≡ h−|−i ≡ 1; h+|−i = 0

|+i and |−i form a complete (?) and orthonormal (?) set of basis. From the complete-

ness relation: 1 = (|+i h+|) + (|−i h−|), we have

S |+i = +~ 2

|+i

S |−i = −~ 2

|−i

⎫⎪⎪⎬⎪⎪⎭

⇔S |+i h+| = +~

2|+i h+|

S |−i h−| = −~ 2

|−i h−|

⎫⎪⎪⎬⎪⎪⎭

S (|+i h+| + |−i h−|) =~

2(|+i h+| − |−i h−|)

S =~

2(|+i h+| − |−i h−|)

In general any operator for an observable can be expressed in terms of its eigenvalues

and eigenstates,

A |i = |i

A =X

|i h|

Let us construct two operators:

S+ = ~ |+i h−|

S− = ~ |−i h+|

28

Page 45: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 45/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

From the definition, we get⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

S+ |+i = ~ |+i h−|+i = 0

S+ |−i = ~ |+i h−|−i = ~ |+i

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

S− |+i = ~ |−i h+|+i = ~ |−i

S− |−i = ~ |−i h+|−i = 0

Let

|+i ≡

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ ; |−i ≡

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

1

⎞⎟⎟⎠

On the base, we have

S = ~ 2

⎛⎜⎜⎝1 0

0 −1

⎞⎟⎟⎠ ; S+ = ~ ⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 1

0 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ ; S− = ~ ⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 0

1 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

B 1.6.3 Probability Postulate

The probability for jumping into some particular¯()

®is given by

the probability for ¯()® : = ¯-()|®¯2

provided that |i is normalized (h|i = 1). (|i =P¯

()® -

()|®

).

h|i =X

h¯()

® -()|

®= 1 =

X

29

Page 46: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 46/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

The expectation value of A with respect to state |i is defined as

hAi ≡ h |A| i =P

-|()

® -() |A| ()

® -()|

®

=P

() ׯ-

|()®¯2

=P

()

-() |A| ()® =

where is the probability in the state¯()

®.

Selective measurement (or filtration)

We imagine a measurement process with a device that selects only one of

the eigenket and rejects all others. Mathematically, we can say that such a selective

measurement amounts to applying the projection operator.

B 1.6.4 S and S

We are now in the position to determine the eigenkets of S and S and the operators

from the results of sequential Stern-Gerlach experiments.(see Fig.1.3)

Case (b): The eigenstates of S and S can be expressed in terms of the

eigenstates of S Similar to S, assume the two eigenstates of S are | +i and | −i

with eigenvalues +~ 2

and −~ 2

respectively,

S =~

2(| +i h +| − | −i h −|)

The beam of S+ goes through SGz and splits into two beams with the same intensity,

30

Page 47: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 47/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

| +i = | +i + | −i

From experiment =⇒ |h+| +i|2 = |h+| −i|2 = 12

From experiment =⇒ |h−| +i|2 = |h−| −i|2 = 12

=⇒

⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩| +i = 1

212|+i + 1

2121 |−i

| −i = 1212

|+i + 1212

0

1 |−i

h + | −i = 0

1

2h+|+i +

1

2h−|−i −1+01 = 0 ⇒ 01 = + 1

S =~

2(| +i h +| − | −i h −|)

=~

2(−1 |+i h−| + 1 |−i h+|)

Likewise,

S =~

2(−2 |+i h−| + 2 |−i h+|)

How to determine 1 and 2?

From experiment |h ± | +i|2

= |h ± | −i|2

= 12

=⇒ 1 − 2 = ±2

We just can determine the diff erence of 1 and 2. For convenience we take S to be

real such that,

1 = 0 and 2 = 2

31

Page 48: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 48/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Therefore,

| ±i =1

212(|+i ± |−i);

| ±i =1

212(|+i ± |−i)

and

S =~

2(|+i h−| + |−i h+|)

S =~

2(− |+i h−| + |−i h+|)

In the form of matrix.

S =~

2

⎜⎜⎝0 1

1 0

⎟⎟⎠;S =

~

2

⎜⎜⎝0 −

0

⎟⎟⎠;S =

~

2

⎜⎜⎝1 0

0 −1

⎟⎟⎠The relations between S S and S±:

S+ = S + S

S− = S − S

Define

S ≡ ~ 2

where the dimensionless are called the Pauli matrices:

σ =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 1

1 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ ;σ =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 −

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ ;σ =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1 0

0 −1

⎞⎟⎟⎠

The eigenvalues of these three matrixes are ±1 (Please check it after class!)

32

Page 49: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 49/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

B 1.6.5 The Algebra of Spin Operators

1. The commutation relations

[SS] = −[SS] = ~ S;

[SS ] = ~ S

⎛⎜⎜⎝

= = = 1

= = = −1

⎞⎟⎟⎠

is an antisymmetric tensor.

Eample:

[SS] = S · S − S · S

=~

2(|+i h−| + |−i h+|)

~

2(− |+i h−| + |−i h+|)

−~ 2

(− |+i h−| + |−i h+|)~

2(|+i h−| + |−i h+|)

=~ 2

4( |+i h+| − |−i h−|) − ~

2

4(− |+i h+| + |−i h−|)

= ~ S;

2. The anticommutation relations:

SS =1

2~ 2

33

Page 50: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 50/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

3. The increasing and decreasing operators: S± = S ± S

[SS±] = [SS] ± [SS] = S ± (−S)

= ±S + S ≡ ±S±

[S−

S+] =

−2S

4. The square operator of S

S2 ≡ S2 + S2

+ S2 =

3

4~ 2

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1 0

0 1

⎞⎟⎟⎠ =

3

4~ 2

3

4

=1

2

×µ1 +1

2¶Note: The spin 1/2 operator is neither fermion nor boson.

B 1.6.6 Algebra of the Pauli matrices

= +

B 1.6.7 Observable

Compatible Observables: Observables A and B are defined to be compatible when

the corresponding operators commute,

[AB] = 0

34

Page 51: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 51/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

and incompatible when

[AB] 6= 0

Degeneracy: Suppose there are two or more linear independent eigenkets of

A having the same eigenvalues then the eigenvalues of the two eigenkets are said to be

degenerate.

If a ket |i is an eigenket for both A and B, i.e.

A |i = |i B |i = |i

the ket |i is a simultaneous eigenket of A and B. We can denote it by |i = | i e.g.

[S2S] = 0

S2 |±i =3

4~ 2 |±i ; S |±i = ±

~

2|±i

S2( |+i + |−i) =3

4~ 2( |+i + |−i)

S( |+i + |−i) =~

2( |+i − |−i)

Theorem 1 Suppose that A and B are compatible observable, and eigenvalues of A

are nondegenerate. Then the matrix elements h” |B| 0i are all diagonal. ( A |i = |i

)

G Proof. Suppose A is diagonal on the basis ket ¯()

®

A ¯(

® = ()

¯()

®35

Page 52: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 52/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

and all () 6= () if 6= A and B are compatible, [AB] = 0

-() |[AB]| ()

®

=-

() |[AB−BA]| ()®

= (()

−()) -() |B| ()® = 0

=⇒ -() |B| ()

®= 0 if 6=

If A andB are compatible, we can always diagonalize them on one set of basis

ket simultaneously no matter whether A has degenerate eigenvalues!

Measurement of A and B when [AB] = 0

1. Nondegenerate

|i −→ | i

2. Degenerate

|i −→ P () ¯

0 ()

®−→

¯0 ()

®

Whether or not there is degeneracy, A measurements and B measurements do

not interfere. We can measure A and B accurately at the same time!

Incompatible Observables

36

Page 53: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 53/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Incompatible observables do not have a complete set of simultaneous eigenket.

Two imcompatible observables mean [AB] 6= 0

G Proof. Proof: Assume A and B are incompatible and |0 0i is a complete set of

simultaneous eigenkets. Then

AB |0

0

i = A0

|0

0

i = 0

0

|0

0

i

BA |0 0i = B0 |0 0i = 00 |0 0i

⎫⎪⎪⎬⎪⎪⎭

(AB−BA) |0 0i = [AB] |00i = 0 for all 00

=⇒ [AB] = 0

This is in contradiction to the incompatible assumption!

Accidently, there may exist an simultaneous eigenket for incompatible A and

B. For instance consider a state with the angular momentum = 0. Although the

angular momentum opertors L and L do not commute, the state is a simultaneous

eigenstate of these two operators.

A 1.7 Change of Basis

EXP Example 1

Spin 1/2 system:

37

Page 54: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 54/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Basis I:| +i | −i

S =~

2(| +i h +| − | −i h −|)

S =~

2(| +i h −| − | −i h +|)

S =~

2(− | +i h −| + | −i h +|)

Basis II: | +i | −i

S =~

2(| +i h +| − | −i h −|)

S =~

2(| +i h −| − | −i h +|)

S =~

2(− | +i h −| + | −i h +|)

Connection of two basis

| ±i =1√

2| +i ±

1√ 2

| −i

⎛⎜⎜⎝

| +i

| −i

⎞⎟⎟⎠ =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1√ 2

1√ 2

1√ 2

− 1√ 2

⎞⎟⎟⎠⎛⎜⎜⎝

| +i

| −i

⎞⎟⎟⎠

B 1.7.1 Transformation Operator

Suppose we have two incompatible observables A and B. The ket space can be viewed

as being spanned either by the set |0i or by the set |0i. i.e. A representation or

B representation. Changing the set of base kets is referred to as a change of basis or

change of representation. The two bases are connected by a transformation operator.

38

Page 55: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 55/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Theorem 2 Given two complete and orthogonal sets of base kets, there exist a unitary

operator U such that ¯()

®= U

¯()

®

Unitary operator: UU+ = U+U ≡ 1

G Proof. This theorem is proved by an explicit construction of u: the summation of the

out-product of two sets of eigenket forms an operator

U =P

¯()

® -()

¯

1)

U¯()

®=P

¯()

® -()|()

® | z

=¯()®

2)

UU+ =P

¯()

® -()

¯()

® -()¯

=P

¯()

® -()

¯= 1

B 1.7.2 Transformation Matrix

In the matrix representation, the operator U can be expressed in the form of a matrix

in the base ket ¯()

®

U = -() |U| ()

® = -()|()

®

39

Page 56: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 56/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

For an arbitrary ket in two representations

A:

|i =P

¯()

® -()|

®B:

|i = P ¯()® -()|®Relation of two representations:

-()|

®=

P

-()|()

® -()|

®

=P

-()

¯U†¯

()® -

()|®

Relation of an operator in two representations

-() |X| ()

®

=P

-()|()

® -() |X| ()

® -()|()

®

=

P-

()

¯U†

¯()

®-

() |X| ()

®-

() |U| ()

®=

-()

¯U†XU

¯()

®

=⇒ X = U†XU

− − − − − − A similarity transformation

40

Page 57: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 57/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Trace of an operator: the summation of the diagonal elements

Tr(X) ≡ P

-()

¯X¯()

®

=P

-()|()

® -() |X| ()

® -()|()

®

= P -()|()® -()|()® -() |X| ()®=

P

-()|()

® -() |X| ()

®

=P

-() |X| ()

®

The trace of X is independent of representation. We can also prove:

Tr(XY) = Tr(YX); Tr(U†XU) = Tr(X)

B 1.7.3 Diagonalization

When we know the matrix elements of B in the base |0i how do we obtain the

eigenvalues and eigenket of B?

B¯()®

= ¯()®

41

Page 58: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 58/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

In the base ket ¯()®

the operator is expressed as

B¯()® -

()¯

= ¯()® -

()¯

BX

¯()® -

()¯

=X

¯()® -

()¯

B = X ¯()® -()¯In the Dirac bra-ket notation, we rewrite it as

P

-() |B| ()

® -()|()

®=

-()|()

®

Furthermore, in the matrix form,⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

11 12 · · ·

21 22 · · ·

......

. . .

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

()1

()2

...

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

= ()

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

()

1

()2

...

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

where

=-

() |B| ()®

and

() =

-()|()

®As we know from linear algebra, the eigenvalues are determined by

det(B− 1) = 0

EXP Example 2

42

Page 59: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 59/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

S =~

2

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 1

1 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

det(S − 1) = 0 ⇒ det

⎛⎜⎜⎝

− ~ 2

~ 2

⎞⎟⎟⎠

= 0

2 − ~ 2

4= 0 ⇒ = ±

~

2

Eigenvectors?

A 1.8 Position, Momentum, and Translation

B 1.8.1 Continuous Spectra

When the eigenvalues of an observable is continuous, the dimensionality of the vector

space is infinite. Denote the eigenvalue-eigenket relation by

| i = | i

43

Page 60: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 60/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

We generalize of a vector space with finite dimension to that with infinite dimension

discrete continuous

h0|”i = 0” h 0| ”i = ( 0 − j)P|0i h0| = 1

R | i h | = 1

|i = P ¯()® -()¯ i |i = R | i h | i

h” |A| 0i = 0 0” h ” | | 0i = 0 ( 0 − j)

1. The Kronecker symbol is replaced by Dirac’s -function.

2. The discrete sum over the eigenvalues is replaced by an integral over a continuous

variable.

B 1.8.2 Some properties of the −function.

1.R

() = 1

2. () = (−)

3. 0() = − 0(−)

4. () = 0

5. 0() = − (−)

6. () = 1

(−)

7. (2

−2) = 1

2( (

−) + (

−))

44

Page 61: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 61/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

8. ( − ) · () = ( − ) ()

9.R

( − ) ( − ) = ( − )

Representation of the −function

() = lim→∞

sin

() = lim→0

1

12−

22

Normalization in terms of the −function

() = ·

+∞

R −∞∗()() = 2

+∞

R −∞−(−)

= 2 lim→∞

+R −

−(−) = 22 lim→+∞

sin( − )

( − )

= 22 ( − ) = ( − )

⇒ 22 = 1 =⇒ = 1√

2

B 1.8.3 Position Eigenkets and Position Measurements

To extend the idea of a filtering process to measurements of observables exhibiting

continues spectra, we consider the position operator in one dimension. The eigenkets

|0i of the position operator x satisfying

x |0i = 0 |0i

45

Page 62: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 62/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

are postulated to form a complete set. The state ket for an arbitrary physical states

can be expanded in terms of |0i

|i =

Z 0 |0i h0|i

Suppose we place a very tiny detector that clicks only when the particle is precisely

at 0 and nowhere else after the detector clicks, we can say the state in question is

represented by |0i. In practice the best the detector can do is to locate the particle

within a narrow range (0 − ∆

2 0 + ∆

2) (∆ is very small). When the detector clicks,

the state ket changes abruptly as follows

|i = Z ∞

−∞

0 |0i h0|i measurement

−−−−−−−−−→

+∆2

R −∆

2

0 |0i h0|i

Assume that h0|i does not change appreciably within the narrow interval, the prob-

ability that the detector clicks is given by

|h|i|2∆

Obviously,

+∞R −∞

|h|i|2 = 1 = h|i

In the wave mechanics, the physical state is represented by a wave function. Thus h|i

is the wave function in the position space for the state |i

Wave function in position space: h0|i in |i =R

0 |0i h0|i is the wave

function in the position space. We assume that the position eigenkets |0i are complete.

46

Page 63: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 63/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

It can be three dimensional, i.e. 0 in |0i stand for three components of the position

vectors. In this word the position is an observable, and [ ] = 0

B 1.8.4 Translation

Suppose we start with a state that is well located around 0, and introduce an translation

operator T() such that

T() |i = | + i

Several properties of T():

1. Identity operation: T( = 0) = 1

2. Associative: T(1)T(2) = T(1 + 2)

3. Inverse operation: T(−)T() = 1 ⇐⇒ T(−) = T−1()

4. Probability conservation: T()†T() = 1

From the definition we have

h|T()

= h + |

-¯T()†T()

¯®

= h + | + i = h|i

This leads to the property (4). We now consider an infinitesimal translation = → 0.

We demonstrate that if T() is taken to be

T() ≈ 1

−K + 0(()2)

47

Page 64: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 64/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

where K is an Hermitian operator K† = K then all properties listed are satisfied.

Let us check them one by one.

1. = 0 :

T( = 0) = 1

2. T(1)T(2) = T(1 + 2) :

(1 − K1)(1 − K2)

= 1 − K(1 + 2) + 0(12)

3. T(

−)T() = 1

(1 + K)(1 − K) = 1 − K2()2 = 1

4. T()†T() = 1

(1 − K)†(1 − K) = (1 + K†)(1 − K)

= 1 + (K† −K) + 0(()2)

48

Page 65: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 65/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Commutation relation of x and K:

xT() |i = x | + i = ( + ) | + i

T()x |i = T() |i = T() |i = | + i

=

⇒(xT()

−T()x) |i = | + i

=⇒ (−xK + Kx) |i = | + i ≈ |i

=⇒ [xK] =

x and K do not commute with each other!

Momentum Operator in the Position Basis.

Translation Operator for an infinitesimal small displacement is defined as

(T() = 1 − K). Let T() act on an arbitrary state

|i → T() |i =

Z T() |i h|i =

Z | + i h|i

= Z |i h − |i + →

=

Z |i (h|i −

h|i ) =

Z |i (1 −

) h|i

also =⇒Z

|i h|T() |i =

Z |i h| (1 − K) |i

=

Z |i (h|i − K h|i ) =⇒ K = −

49

Page 66: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 66/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Consider an ideal wave function

h|i =1

(2)12+x~

which has the momentum

K h|i =

~ h|i

The physical significance of K is that K is an operator for the momentum with a

proportionality factor. The factor is the Planck’s constant over 2 : ~ = 2

L. de Broglie’s relation (1924):

2

=

~

de Broglie wave is also called matter wave, any aspect of the behavior or

properties of a material object that varies in time or space in conformity

with the mathematical equations that describe waves. By analogy with the

wave and particle behavior of light that had already been established exper-

imentally, the French physicist Louis de Broglie suggested (1924) that par-

ticles might have wave properties in addition to particle properties. Three

years later the wave nature of electrons was detected experimentally. Ob-

jects of everyday experience, however, have a computed wavelength much

smaller than that of electrons, so their wave properties have never been de-

tected; familiar objects show only particle behavior. De Broglie waves play

50

Page 67: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 67/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

an appreciable role, therefore, only in the realm of subatomic particles. The

response of the wave properties of a particle to an external force follows a

basic law of quantum mechanics that, in its mathematical form, is known

as the Schrödinger equation.

The momentum operator in the position space

p = −~

The commutation relation:

[xp] = ~

[xp] () = (xp− px) () = −~

() + ~

( ())

= −~

() + ~

() + ~ ()

Therefore

[xp] () = ~ ()

In the momentum space,

[xp]( ) = ~ ( )

[xp]( ) = (xp− px)( )

=

µ~

− ~

¶( ) = ~ ( )

51

Page 68: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 68/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

x =~

A 1.9 The Uncertainty Relation

The commutation relation [xp] = ~ shows that the position and the momentum are

incompatible. This relation leads to the famous uncertainty relation

-(∆x)2

® -(∆p)2

® ≥ ~ 24

Let A ad B be observables. Define ∆A ≡ A− hAi. The expectation value of h(∆A)2i

is known as the dispersion of A. For any pair of operators, A and B, we have

-(∆A)2

® -(∆B)2

® ≥ |h[AB]i|2 4

The uncertainty relation can be understood from the postulate of measurement. For

an eigenstate of A,

-(∆A)2

®= 0

If a simultaneous eigenstate of A and B, we have

-(∆A)2

® -(∆B)2

®= 0

Before presenting a proof of the uncertainty relationship, I introduce several examples

first.

52

Page 69: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 69/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

EXP Example 3

A plane wave with a momentum 0:

0() =1

(2~ )12exp[0~ ]

The probability to find x is a constant in the whole space, ¯ 0()¯2=

12~

= 0

hi → 0;-

2® → +∞

EXP Example 4

A particle at = 0:

0() = ( − 0)

In the momentum space,

0() = ( − 0)

=

Z

2~ (−0)~

( ) = 0~

53

Page 70: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 70/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

= 0

h i → 0;- 2® → +∞

EXP Example 5

A Gaussian wave package:

() =1

14120

exp[−2220]

The particle is mainly confined in the regime, ∼ 0. In the k

space,

( ) = 1(2)12

Z ()−~

=1

(2)12

Z 1

14120

exp[−2220 − ~ ]

=1

(2)12

Z 1

14120

exp[−1

2

µ

0+

0

~

¶2

] exp[−1

2

³ 0

~

´2

]

=

√ 214

120

(2)12 Z 1

12√ 20 exp[−1

2 µ

0 +

0

~ ¶2

] exp[−1

2 ³ 0

~ ´2

]

=0

14120

exp[− 2202~ 2]

The particle is mainly confined in the regime, ∼ ~ 0 Thus

∼ ~

The proof of the uncertainty relationship

54

Page 71: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 71/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

G Proof.

-(∆A)2

®=

-(A− hAi)2

®=-A2 − 2A hAi + hAi2

®

=-A2®− hAi2 ≥ 0

1) The Schwarz inequality

h|i · h | i ≥ |h| i|2

where the equality only holds if |i = | i

(h| + ∗ h |)(|i + | i) ≥ 0

taking = − h|ih|i

⎫⎪⎪⎬⎪⎪⎭

=⇒ h|i h | i ≥ |h| i|2

To simplify the problem, we can take h|i = h | i = 1 and |h| i|2 ≤ 1 Let

|i = ∆A |i

| i = ∆B |i

=⇒ -(∆A)2

® -(∆B)2

® ≥ |h∆A∆Bi|2

where we have used the hermiticity of A and B since they are observables,

∆A = (∆A)†

55

Page 72: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 72/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

2)

∆A∆B =1

2(∆A∆B−∆B∆A)

+1

2(∆A∆B +∆B∆A)

=1

2

[∆A∆B] +1

2

∆A∆B

=1

2[AB] +

1

2∆A∆B

Anti-Hermitian of [AB]:

[AB]† = (AB−BA)†

= (AB)† − (BA)†

= B†A† −A†B†

= −[AB]

Hermitian of ∆A∆B

(∆A∆B)+ = ∆A∆B

56

Page 73: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 73/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

3) a. The Hermitian operator has only purely real expectation value

H† = H =⇒

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

H |i = |i

h|H† = h| ∗;

=⇒

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

h |H| i =

- ¯H†¯® = ∗

=⇒ = ∗

b. The anti-Hermitian operator has only purely imaginary expectation value

Q† = −Q

Q | i = | i h |Q† = ∗ h |

h |Q| i = -

¯Q†¯ ® = ∗

=⇒ = − ∗

Therefore

h∆A∆Bi =1

2h[AB]i +

1

2(h∆A∆Bi)

= + Im h∆A∆Bi + Re h∆A∆Bi

|h∆A∆Bi|2 =1

4|h[AB]i|2 +

1

4|h∆A∆Bi|2

≥ 1

4|h[AB]i|2

-(∆A)2

® -(∆B)2

® ≥ 1

4(h[AB]i)2

57

Page 74: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 74/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

For the position and momentum operators,

[xp] = ~

-(∆x)2

®-

(∆p)2

®≥ ~ 24

Since the position and momentum operators are incompatible, [xp] 6= 0 we cannot

find a complete set of simultaneous eigenkets for x and p such that the two observables

can be measured at the same time. For instance for an eigenstate of x, x |i = |i, it

is not an eigenstate of the momentum. It can be spanned in the momentum space,

p |i = pZ | i h |i = Z | i h |i

You may have an expectation value for p.

EXP Example 6

Momentum Determination Experiment

We assume that the particle is an atom in an excited state,

which will give off a photon that has the frequency 0 if the atom is at

rest. Because of the Doppler eff ect, the motion of the atom toward

the observer with speed means that the observed frequency is

given approximately by

≈ 0(1 +

) =⇒ = (

0− 1)

58

Page 75: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 75/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

Accurate measurement of the momentum by measurement of

the frequency requires a relatively long time ; the minimum error

in the frequency measurement can be shown to be ∆ ≈ 1 The

instant at which the photon is emitted is uncertain by , at this

instant, the momentum of the atom decreases by ~ , and its

velocity decreases by ~ . This makes the subsequent position

of the atom uncertain by the amount ∆ ≈ ~

· Since the later

the photon is emitted, the longer the atom has the higher velocity

and the farther it will have traveled. This position uncertainty arises

entirely because of the finiteness of . If were zero, and we knew

the velocity and the velocity change on emission of photon, we would

know where the atom is at each instant; it is because is finite that

we do not know when the velocity changed and hence where the

atom is later times. The momentum uncertainty is obtained:

∆ ≈ ∆ ≈(

0 −1)

0∆ ≈

0

In the nonrelativistic case considered here 1 =⇒ ≈ 0

Therefore

∆ ·∆ ∼ ~

59

Page 76: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 76/374

CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT

EXP Example 7

2 × 2 matrix: Suppose a 2 × 2 matrix X is written as

= 00 + ·

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 0

0 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠+

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

+

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 −

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠+

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

0 −

⎞⎟⎟⎠

=

⎜⎜⎝0 + −

+ 0 −

⎟⎟⎠

where 0 and are real.

Eigenvalues of X:

det( − ) = 0

60

Page 77: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 77/374

Page 78: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 78/374

CN Chapter 2

CT Quantum Dynamics

This chapter is devoted exclusively to the dynamic development of state kets and/or

observables. In other words, we are concerned here with the quantum mechanical

analogue of Newton’s equation of motion.

A 2.1 Time Evolution and the Schrödinger Equation

B

2.1.1 Time Evolution Operator

We now discuss how a physical state evolves with time. Suppose we have a physical

system whose state ket at 0 is represented by |i. Let us denote the ket corresponding

to the state at some later time by

| 0 : i

62

Page 79: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 79/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Our main task is to study the time evolution of a state ket:

|i = | 0 : 0i =⇒ | 0 : i

As in the case of translation, we assume that the two kets are connected by the time-

evolution operator

| 0 : i = U( 0) |i

Several properties of U:

1. The identity

U(0 0) = 1

2. The unitarity

U†( 0)U( 0) = 1

3. The composition:

U(2 0) = U(2 1)U(1 0)

Because time is assumed to be continuous, we consider an infi

nitesimal time-

evolution operator

| 0; 0 + i = U(0 + 0) |i

As

lim→0

U(0 + 0) = U(0 0) = 1

63

Page 80: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 80/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

we expand the operator in terms of

U(0 + 0) = U(0 0) +

U( 0)|=0 +

= 1 − Ω +

Just like the operator K in the translation operator T(), Ω is a Hermitian operator.

What’s the physical meaning of Ω?

We consider a simple example. In the position space

h| 0 i = h|U( 0)|i

⇓ ˜˜˜ ⇓1

(2)12 (−(−0)) ˜˜˜˜˜˜˜ 1

(2)12 -|−Ω(−0)|®

→ 0 + =⇒ Ω→

In the old quantum theory, the time-frequency is postulated to be related to energy

= ~ (Planck-Einstein Relation)

In the classical mechanics, the energy is related to the Hamiltonian operator H , which

is also the generator of time-evolution. It is then natural to relate or define Ω to the

Hamiltonian operator H:

Ω = H~

Thus

64

Page 81: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 81/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

(0 + 0) = 1 − H

~ +

~ in Ω = H~ andK = p~ : The two constants must be the same which can be checked

by comparing the quantum mechanical equation of motion with the classical equation

of motion, say

x

=

p

B 2.1.2 The Schrödinger Equation.

We are now in the position to derive the fundamental diff erential equation for the time-

evolution operator U( 0) and a physical state |i From the composition property of

U

U( + 0) = U( + )U( 0)

=

µ1 −

H

~

¶U( 0)

U( + 0) −U( 0)

=−

~

HU( 0)

Take → 0+ we obtain

~

U( 0) = HU( 0)

65

Page 82: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 82/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Multiplying a state ket from the right sides

~

U( 0) |i = HU( 0) |i

~

| 0; i = H | 0; i

Here we list several formal solutions to the Schrodinger equation for the time-evolution

operator U( 0)

Case A: The Hamiltonian operator is independent of time,

~

U( 0) = HU( 0)

~ U( 0)

U( 0)= H

~

lnU( 0) = H

lnU( 0) − lnU(0 0) = −

~

Z 0

H

U( 0) = exp[−

~ H( − 0)]

Strictly speaking, the present derivation is not correct completely sinceU is an operator,

not number. However the final solution is exact,

exp[−

~ H( − 0)] = 1 −

~ H( − 0) +

1

2

∙−

~ H( − 0)

¸2

+ · · ·

Case B: The Hamiltonian H is time-dependent but the H0 at diff erent times

commute

Z

0

lnU( 0) = −

~ Z

0

H()

66

Page 83: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 83/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

U( 0) = exp

∙−

~

Z 0

H()

¸

Case C: The Hamiltonian H is time-dependent but the H0s at diff erent times

do not commute, i.e.

[H(1)H(2)] 6= 0

U( 0) = 1 − ~ Z

01H(1) + (−)

2

~ 2Z 0

1Z 10

2H(1)H(2) + · · ·

= 1 +∞P=1

(−

~ )Z 0

1

Z 10

2

Z −1

0

× H(1)H(2) · · ·H()

Energy Eigenkets:

To be able to evaluate the eff ect of time-evolution operator on a general ket

|i, we consider a special base ket used in expanding |i Assume that we know all

energy eigenkets of an time-independent H with eigenvalues

H¯()

®=

¯()

®¯()

® forms a complete and orthogonal set of base kets. Therefore

U( 0) = exp(−H( − 0)~ )

=P

¯()

® -()

¯−

H

~ (−0)

¯()

® -()

¯

=P

−~

(−0)¯()

® -()

¯

Once the expansion of the initial ket |i in terms of ¯()

® is known,

|i =

P ¯()

® -()

¯i =

P ¯

()

®

67

Page 84: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 84/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The time-evolution operator enables us to solve any initial time problem,

| 0; i = −H

~ (−0) |i

=P

−~

(−0)¯()

®

In other words

( = 0) = → () = −~

(−0)

The phase of () changes with time, but its modulus remains unchanged. If all

eigenvalues are not degenerate, the relative phases of do vary with time and the

state ket varies with time.

A special case: if the initial state happens to be one of energy eigenkets, say

|i =¯()

® we have

| 0; i = −~

(−0)¯()

®

The state remains unchanged. Thus the basic task in quantum dynamics is reduced

tofi

nd a complete set of energy eigenket and eigenvalues. It is very helpful if we canfind a maximal set of commuting observables A, B, C,...which also commute with the

Hamiltonian

[AB] = [BC] = [AC] = · · · = 0

[AH] = [BH] = [CH] = · · · = 0

68

Page 85: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 85/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

In the case, the energy eigenket can be characterized by the indices ≡

For example, ⎧⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎩

A |i = |i

B |i = |i

· · ·

H |i = |i

Therefore it is of fundamental importance to find a complete set of mutually compatible

observables that also commute with H.

B 2.1.3 Time Dependence of Expectation Value: Spin Preces-

sion.

It is instructive to study how the expectation value of an observable changes as a

function of time. To end this we treat an example here: spin precession. We start with

a Hamiltonian of a spin 1/2 system with magnetic moment = ~ subjected to

an external magnetic field B = e

= −

S · B = −

S = S

As

S =~

2

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1 0

0 −1

⎞⎟⎟⎠

69

Page 86: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 86/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

then the corresponding eigenvalues of H are

± = ±~

2 (= )

Since the Hamiltonian is time-independent, the time-evolution operator for the state

ket

( 0) = −S~

The eigenkets of S are

|+i =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ for = +

~

2

|−i =⎛⎜⎜⎝ 0

1

⎞⎟⎟⎠ for = −~ 2

=⇒ |±i = ±1

2~ |±i .

i.e., |±i are also the energy eigenkets with eigenvalues ±~ 2 Suppose at = 0

|i = +

|+i + −

|−

i

At a later time t,

| 0 : i = ( 0) |i

= +−2 |+i + −+

2 |−i

70

Page 87: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 87/374

Page 88: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 88/374

Page 89: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 89/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Another mathematical observation is that

¡h|U†

¢X (U | i) = h|

¡U†XU

¢| i

that follows from the associative axiom of multiplication. This identity suggests two

diff erent approaches to evaluate the expectation values of physical observables under

the unitary transformation.

B 2.2.2 Two Approaches

When we are concerned with a time-dependent of a physical observable X there are

two approaches:

Approach I:

|i → | 0 : i = U( 0) | 0i

hXi = h 0 : |X | 0 : i =-

¯U†XU

¯®

Approach II:

|i → |i

X → U†XU ≡ X()

hXi = h |X()| i =-

¯U†XU

¯®

The expectation values of two approaches are the same!

hXi = hXi

73

Page 90: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 90/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Approach I (The Schrodinger Picture): The state ket varies with time while

operators do not change

|i → U |i X → X

Recall the Schrodinger equation for the wave function, i.e., the state.

Approach II (The Heisenberg Picture): The operators vary with time while

the ket does not change

|i → |i X → U†XU

Recall the Heisenberg equation for operators.

We denote the operator X( ) in the Heisenberg picture. U() = U( 0) The

relation of an observable in two pictures

X( ) () = U†()X( )U()

The state ket

| 0 : i = | 0 = 0i ;

| 0 : i = U() | 0 = 0i = U() | 0 : i

74

Page 91: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 91/374

Page 92: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 92/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

B 2.2.4 How to construct a Hamiltonian

1. For a physical system with classical analogue we assume the Hamiltonian to be

of the same form as in classical physics; we merely replace the classical 0 and

0 by the corresponding operators x and p in quantum mechanics. With this

assumption we can reproduce the correct classical equation in the classical limit.

It is required that the Hamiltonian in quantum mechanics should be Hermitian.

2. When the physical system in question has no classical analogues, we can only

guess the structure of the Hamiltonian. We try various forms until we get the

Hamiltonian that leads to results agreeing with empirical observation.

Two useful formulas:

[x (p)] = ~

and

[p (x)] = −~

where F and G are functions that can be expanded in powers of 0 and 0

respectively.

EXP Example 1

A free particle: The Hamiltonian to describe the motion of a free

particle of mass is taken to be of the same form as in classical

76

Page 93: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 93/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

mechanics:

H =p2

2=

1

2(p2 + p2

+ p2)

We look at the observables and (they are operators, NOT num-

bers)

p =1

~

[pH] = 0

x =

1

~ [xH] =

p

=p(0)

So

x() = x(0) +p(0)

We know

[x(0)x (0)] = 0

but

[x()x(0)] = −~

EXP Example 2

A particle in a potential.

H =p2

2+ V()

77

Page 94: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 94/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The Heisenberg equation of motion leads to

p

=1

~ [pV()] = −

V()

x

=1

~ [xH] =

p

Furthermore,

2x

2=

1

~ [x

H] =1

~ [p

H] ≡ 1

p

2x

2= −∇ ()

Newtonian Equation?

The expectation value of this equation is known as the Ehrenfest

theorem. It has the classical mechanics analogue. The reason is

that the Planck constant disappears in the equation.

A 2.3 Simple Harmonic Oscillator.

B 2.3.1 Eigenvalue and eigenstates

We consider a simple harmonic oscillator in a one-dimensional case. The basic Hamil-

tonian is

=2

2+

222

78

Page 95: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 95/374

Page 96: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 96/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

such that

[ †] = 1

Furthermore,

† =

2~ ( −

)( +

) =

~ − 1

2

Thus

= ~ ( +1

2)

where

= †

Obviously,

[ ] = 0

and can be diagonalized simultaneously. We denote the eigenkets of by its

eigenvalues n. So

|i = |i

and

|i = ( +1

2)~ |i

What’s ?

We first note that

[ ] = † − † = [ †] =

80

Page 97: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 97/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

[† ] = −†

As a result,

† |i =©

[ †] + † ª

|i

= ( + 1)† |i

Likewise,

|i = ( − 1) |i

Thus † |i is also an eigenket of with eigenvalue + 1 (increased by one). |i is

an eigenket of with eigenvalue −1 (decreased by one). So we call a the decreasing

operator and †

the increasing operator. From the point of view of energy, the increase

(decrease) of n by one amounts to the creation (annihilation) of one quantum unit of

energy. Hence the terms “creation and annihilation operator” for † and are deemed

appropriate. Since |i is an eigenket with − 1 . We write

|i = | − 1i

(h| +)( |i) = h − 1| ( ∗ ) | − 1i

-¯+

¯®

= = | |2 ≥ 0

81

Page 98: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 98/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

We take real. then,

|i = 12 | − 1i

Likewise,

† |i = ( + 1)12 | + 1i

Suppose we keep on applying a to both sides of the equation,

2 |i = [( − 1)]12 | − 2i ;

3 |i = [( − 1)( − 2)]12 | − 3i

The sequence of the eigenket must terminate at = 0 as ≥ 0 If is a non-integer,

the sequence shall not terminate and leads to eigenkets with negative eigenvalues. This

is in contradiction with ≥ 0 . To conclude n is a nonnegative integer. The lowest

energy state, i.e. the ground state of the oscillator is

=0 =1

2~

The eigenstate eigenvalue

|0i 12~

|1i = † |0i 32~

|2i = 1212

(†)2 |0i 52~

|3i = 1

(3!)12(†)3 |0i 7

2~

......

|i = 1

(!)12(†) |0i ( + 1

2)~

82

Page 99: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 99/374

Page 100: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 100/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The matrix elements of and are

h0 || i =

µ~

2

¶12

(12 0−1 + ( − 1)12 0+1)

h0 | | i = µ~

2 ¶12

(−12 0−1 + ( − 1)12 0+1)

In the position representation: the wave function

We first derive h|0i

|0i = 0

=⇒ h || 0i = 0

=⇒Z

0 h || 0i h0 |0i = 0

Recall

= ³

2~ ´12

( +

)

h || 0i = ( − 0)

h | | 0i = −~ ( − 0)

=⇒ ( +~

) h|0i = 0

84

Page 101: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 101/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 2.1: Energy eigenfunctions for the first six states of the harmonic oscillator.

Take ~ = 20 The solution of the equation is

h|0i =1

14 12

0

exp(−1

2

2

20

)

In general

h|i =

*

¯¯¯

(†)

(!)12

¯¯¯

0

+=

*

¯¯¯

(†)

(!)12

¯¯¯

+h|0i

= −+1

20

14 (2!)12

( − 20

)−

2

220

B 2.3.2 Time Development of the Oscillator

So far we have not discussed the time evolution of oscillator state ket or observables

like and . Everything we did is supposed to hold at some instant of time, say = 0.

85

Page 102: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 102/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 2.2: The position probability density for the state n=10 of a harmonic oscillator

(solid curve) and for a classical oscillator of the same total energy (dashed line).

Now we come to see the time evolution of and . In the Heisenberg picture,

=

1

~ [ ] = −2;

=

1

~ [ ] =

2

2=

1

~ [

] =

1

~ [−2 ] = −2 ;

2

2=

1

~ [

] =

1

~ [

] = −2;

Equivalently,

= − =⇒ () = (0)−

= † =⇒ †() = †(0)

86

Page 103: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 103/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

() +

() = ((0) +

(0)

)−

() −

() = ((0) −

(0)

)

() = (0)cos +1

(0)sin

() =−

(0)sin + (0) cos

For any energy eigenket, we have⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

h |()| i = 0

h | ()| i = 0

For a superposition of energy eigenstates such as

|i = 0

|0i + 1

|1i

we have

h |()| i =

∙~

2( ∗0 1 + 0 ∗1 −)

¸12

= 212 0 | 0 1| cos( + )

It is noted that the average value of the position () in an energy eigenstate is always

zero.

B 2.3.3 The Coherent State

We have seen that an energy eigenstates does not behave like the classical oscillator —

in the sense of oscillating expectation values for and — no matter how large n may

87

Page 104: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 104/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

be.

How can we construct a superposition of energy eigenstates that most closely

imitates the classical oscillator? In wave-function language, we want a wave packet that

bounces back and forth without spreading in shape. It turns out that a coherent state

does the desired job.

A coherent state:

|i = |i

Properties of |i

1. The coherent state |i =P∞=0 () |i

| ()|2 is of the Poisson type about some mean value n

| ()|2 = (

!exp(−))

2. It can be obtained by translating the oscillator ground state by some finite dis-

tance.

3. It satisfies the minimum uncertainty relation at all time

-(∆())2® -(∆ ())2® = ~ 24

4. = ()12

88

Page 105: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 105/374

Page 106: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 106/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The solutions are the Hermite polynomials,

00

− 2 0

+ 2 = 0

such that

= 2 + 1; = ( +1

2)~ = 0 1 2

Alternatively, we may write the Hamiltonian in the form

µ− 2

2+ 2

¶Ψ = Ψ

1

2

∙µ +

¶µ −

¶+

µ −

¶µ +

¶¸Ψ = Ψ

=1√

2

µ +

¶;

† =1√

2

µ −

¶;

[ †] = 1

¡2† + 1

¢Ψ = Ψ

The ground state

Ψ0 = 0

90

Page 107: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 107/374

Page 108: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 108/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Denote by ( ) the wave-function

( ) ≡ h | 0 : i

we have

( ) ≡Z

0 (0 00)(0 )

We call the kernel of the integral operator as the propagator in the wave mechanics.

In any given problem the propagator depends only on the potential and is independent

of the initial and final wave-function. It can be constructed once the energy eigenvalues

and eigen functions are given. Clearly the time evolution of the wave function is com-

pletely predicted if is known and (0 ) is given initially. The only peculiar feature,

if any, is that when a measurement intervenes, the wave function changes abruptly in

an uncontrollable way into one of the eigen functions of observable being measured.

Two Properties of :

1. For 0, satisfies the Schrodinger’s time-dependent wave equation in the

variables 0 an with and 0 fixed.

~

(0 00) = (0 )

G Proof.

(0 00) =P0

h|0i h0|0i −~ 0(−0)

92

Page 109: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 109/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

~

(0 00) =

P0

h|0i h0|0i 0−~ 0(−0)

=P0

h| 0−~ 0(−0) |0i h0|0i

= P0

h| −~ (−0) |0i h0|0i

= h| −~ (−0) |0i

= () (0 )

1.

lim→0

(0 00) = ( − 0)

G Proof.

lim→0

(0 00) = lim→0P0

h|0i h0|0i −0~

(−0)

= lim→0

P0

h|0i h0|0i = h|0i = ( − 0)

The propagator K is simply the Green’s function for the time-dependent wave equation

satisfying

(− ~ 2

2∇2 + () − ~

) (0 00) = −~ ( − 0) ( − 0) (2.1)

93

Page 110: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 110/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

With the boundary condition

(0 00) = 0 for 0

The -function ( − 0) is needed on the right hand side of the Eq.(2.1) because K

varies discontinuously at = 0

EXP Example 3

A free particle in 1D

The Hamiltonian is expressed as

H =P2

2

The momentum P commutes with H. Hence | i is a simultaneous

eigenket of the operators P and H.

P | i = | i

H | i =2

2| i

94

Page 111: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 111/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Thus

(0 00)

=P

h| i h |0i exp

∙−

2

2~ ( − 0)

¸

= Z

2~

exp∙

~ − 0

~ −2

2~

(−

0)¸=

+∞Z −∞

0

2~ exp

∙−

− 0

2~ ( − ( − 0)

− 0)2 +

( − 0)2

2~ ( − 0)

¸

= lim→0+

+∞Z −∞

2~ exp

∙− | | −

− 0

2~ ( − ( − 0)

− 0)2 +

( − 0)2

2~ ( − 0)

¸

=∙

2~ ( − 0)¸12

exp(( −

0

)

2

2~ ( − 0) )

Certain space and time integral derivable from are of considerable.

Without loss of generality, we set 0 = 0 in the following

95

Page 112: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 112/374

Page 113: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 113/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The propergator for the simple harmonic oscillator

(00 ; 0 0) =

r

2~ sin[( − 0)]

× exp

∙ (002 + 02)cos ( − 0) − 2000

2~ sin[( − 0)]

¸

B 2.5.2 Propagator as a Transition Amplitude

To gain further insight into the physical meaning of the propagator, we rewrite it in an

alternative form, which is related to the concept of transition amplitude.

(0 0) = P h|i h|0i − (−0)~

=X

D¯−

~

¯ED

¯0~

¯0E

=XD

¯−

~

¯ED

¯0~

¯0E

= h |0 0i

Where | i and |0 0i are to be understood as an eigenket and of the position operators

in the Heisenberg picture. Roughly speaking, h |0 0i is the amplitude for the particle

to go from a space-time point (0 0) to another one ( )

97

Page 114: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 114/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 2.3: Paths in x-t plane.

B 2.5.3 Path Integral as the Sum Over Paths

Without loss of generality we restrict ourselves to one-dimensional problem. The entire

time interval between = 1 and = is divided into − 1 equal parts.

− −1 = ∆ = − 1

− 1( = 1 )

Exploiting the composition property we obtain

h |1 1i

=Z

−1

Z −2

Z 2

× h | −1 −1i h −1 −1| −2 −2i

h2 2|1 1i

98

Page 115: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 115/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Before proceeding further, it is profitable to review here how paths appear in classical

mechanics. Suppose we have a particle subjected to a force field, say gravitional field.

() ⇔

(1 1) ⇔ ( 0)

( ) ⇔ (0

µ2

¶12

)

The classical Lagrangian is written as

( ) =1

22 − ()

According to Hamiltonian’s principle, the unique path is determined by minimizing the

action

Z 1

( ) = 0

Lagraingian equation:

= 0

B 2.5.4 Feynman’s Formalism

The basic diff erence between classical mechanics and quantum mechanics should be

apparent: In classical mechanics, a definite path in − plane is associated with the

particle’s motion; in contrast, in quantum mechanics all possible paths must play roles

99

Page 116: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 116/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

including those which do not bear any resemblance to the classical path. Yet the

diff erence should disappear when ~ → 0. To formulate Feynman’s approach, let us go

back to h |−1 −1i with ∆ = − −1 (∆ → 0). We write

h |−1 −1i =1

(∆)exp[ ( − 1)~ ]

where

( − 1) =

Z −1

( )

and (∆) is determined by

h |−1 −1i |=−1 = ( − −1)

Because at any given time the position kets in the Heisenberg picture form a complete

set, it is legitimate to insert the identity operator written as

Z | i h | = 1

at any time we desire. For example,

- | ® = Z - | ® - | ®=

Z 0

- |0 0

®h0 0| i

- |

®

=

and so on. If we somehow guess the form of h2 2|1 1i for a finite time interval by

compounding the appropriate transition amplitude for infinitesimal time interval. This

100

Page 117: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 117/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

property leads to formulate a space-time approach to quantum mechanics. Our task is

to evaluate the ∆ → 0 limit of ( − 1). As ∆ → 0

( − 1) =

Z −1

(1

22 − ())

= ∆(1

2

( − −1

)2

− (

− −1

2

))

For a free-particle case, = 0,

h |−1 −1i |=−1 = ( − −1)

we obtain

1

(∆)

= ³

2~ ∆´12

where we have used∞Z

−∞

³

2~ ∆

´12

2~ ∆2 = 1

and

lim∆→0

³

2~ ∆

´12

2~ ∆2 = ( )

To summarize, as ∆ → 0 we obtain

h |−1 −1i =³

2~ ∆

´12

(−1)

~

101

Page 118: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 118/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The final expression for the transition amplitude with − 1 is

h |1 1i = lim →+∞

(

2~ ∆) −12

Z −1 −22

Y=2

(−1)

~

h |1 1i ≡ Z 1

D((1)) ∫ 1()~

This is Feynman’s path integral!

Motivated by Dirac, Feynman attempted a new formulation of quantum me-

chanics based on the concept of paths. The ideas we borrowed from the conventional

form of the quantum mechanics are (1) the superposition principle (used in summing

the contribution from various alternate paths), (2) the composition property of the

transition amplitude, and (3) classical correspondence in the~ → 0 limit.

A 2.6 The Gauge Transformation and Phase of Wave

Function

B 2.6.1 Constant Potential

In classical mechanics, it is well known that the zero point of potential energy is of no

physical significance. The force that appears in Newton’s second law depends only on

102

Page 119: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 119/374

Page 120: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 120/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 2.4: Quantum-mechanical interference to detect a potential diff erence.

then the corresponding time dependence computed with () + 0 is

−( + 0)(−0)~

Even though the choice of the absolute scale of the potential is arbitrary,

potential diff erence are of non-trivial physical significance and in fact, can be detected

in a very striking way. A beam of charged particles is split into two parts, each of

which enters a metallic cage. A particle in the beam can be visualized as a wave packet

whose dimension is much smaller than the dimension of the cage. Inside the cage the

potential is spatially uniform. Hence the particle in the cage experience no force. If we

desire, a finite potential diff erence between the two cages can be maintained by turning

on a switch. The final state which the two beams reach at interference region is

| i =1

212| 0 : i +

1

212| 0 : i

Thus

h | i = 1 + cos [(

− )~ ]

104

Page 121: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 121/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

This is an observable eff ect! This is a purely quantum mechanical eff ect and has no

classical analogue.

B 2.6.2 Gauge Transformation in Electromagnetism

We first recall the Maxwell’s equations⎧⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎩

∇ · D = 4;

∇ × H = 4J + 1

D

;

∇ · B = 0;

∇ × E = −1 B

D = E + 4P

H = B− 4M

We introduce a scalar potential and a vector potential A⎧⎪⎪⎨

⎪⎪⎩

B = 5 × A

E =

−5

−1 A

Then the Maxwell’s equations are reduced to⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

52 − 12 2

2 = −4

52A− 12 2

2A = −4

with

5 · A +1

= 0

105

Page 122: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 122/374

Page 123: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 123/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

We call that p is canonical momentum and is kinetic (or mechanical) momentum.

The commutation relation of and is

[ ] = −~

(

)

= −~

(5 × A)

Hence the Hamiltonian can be rewritten as

=2

2+

We now study the Schrodinger’s equation with and in the position space.

D ¯(p−

A())2 ¯ 0 : E=

Z 1

Z 2

D¯(p−

A())

¯1

ED1

¯(p−

A()) |2i h2

¯ 0 :

E

= (−~ 5 −

A())2 h| 0 : i

Thus the Schrodinger’s equation is derived as

[1

2(−~ 5 −

())2 + ] h| 0 : i = ~

h| 0 : i

Denote

( ) ≡ h| 0 : i

and

= ∗()()

107

Page 124: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 124/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The time derivative of the density is

= (

∗) + ∗

= − 5 · j

+ 5 · j = 0

where

j = ~

Im(∗ 5 ) −

A ||2

For

= 12~

j =

(5 −

A)

B 2.6.3 The Gauge Transformation

In quantum mechanics, we consider the gauge transformation⎧⎪⎪⎨

⎪⎪⎩

→ + 5Λ

e.g. Consider a uniform magnetic field in z direction

B = = (

)

To derive the field, we can choose

(1). = −12

= 12

108

Page 125: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 125/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

(2). = − = 0

These two vector potentials are connected by a gauge transformation

A → A + 5(

2)

Let us denote by |i the state ket in the presence of A, and |i the state ket in the

presence of A + 5(2

) The Schrodinger’s equations for these two state kets are

[1

2(p−

A)2 + ] | 0 : i = ~

| 0 : i

[1

2(p−

A−

5 Λ)2 + ] ^| 0 : i = ~

^| 0 : i

What’s the relation of | 0 : i and ^| 0 : i ?

We come to construct an operator G such that

|i = G |i

with GG †=1

G†[1

2(p−

A−

5 Λ)2 + ]G | 0 : i = ~

| 0 : i

We require

(1). h|x|i = h|x|i :

G†G =

109

Page 126: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 126/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

(2).-

|p− A|

®=D

|p− A|

E:

G†³p−

A−

´G =

³p−

G†[p G] = +

G†(−

~ ∇

G) = +

−~ ∇ ln G = +

G = exph

~ Λ

iTherefore, if we take

|i = ~ Λ |i

then

−~ Λ(

1

2(p−

A−

5Λ)2 + )

~ Λ

=1

2(p−

A)2 +

The two wave-function are related via

( ) = ~ Λ( )

110

Page 127: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 127/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 2.5:

In the form = 12 exp[~ ]we have

A → A + ∇Λ

→ +

Λ

B 2.6.4 The Aharonov-Bohm Eff ect

Consider a particle of charge e going above or below a very long impenetrable cylinder,

as shown in Fig.

Inside the cylinder is a magnetic field parallel to the cylinder axis, taken to be

normal to the plane of Fig. So the particle paths above and below enclose a magnetic

flux.

Assume the magnetic field

B =

⎧⎪⎪⎨

⎪⎪⎩

if

0 if

111

Page 128: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 128/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Hence the particle does not experience the Lorentz force outside cylinder.

A =

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

(0 12

0), if

(0 12

2 0), if

Our object is to study how the probability of finding the particle in the interference

region B depends on the magnetic flux. For pedagogical reason we prefer to use the

Feynman path-integral method to attack this problem.

In the presence of the magnetic field, the Lagrangian can be obtained

(0) =

1

2 2 → 1

22 +

· A

where = x The corresponding change in the action is given by

(0)( − 1) → (0)( − 1) +

R −1

· A

= (0)( − 1) +

R −1

· A

where is the diff erential line element along the path segment. So when we consider

the entire contribution from 1 to We have

Q

exp( (0)( − 1)~ )

=⇒ Q

exp( (0)( − 1)~ )exp(

~

R −1

A · )

The entire transition amplitude is

R

[()](0)(1)

~ × ~

R 1

+

R

[()](0)(1)

~ × ~

R 1

112

Page 129: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 129/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The probability for finding the particle in the interference region B depends on the

modulus square of the entire transition amplitude and hence on the phase diff erence

between the contribution from the paths going above and below. i.e.

∝ 1 + cos(1 − 2)

where

1 − 2 =

~

(R 1

A · −R 1

A ·

)

=

~

I A ·

=

~ ZZ ∇ × A ·

=

~

where stands for the magnetic flux inside the impenetrable cylinder. This means

that as we change the magnetic field strength, there is a sinusoidal component in the

probability for observing the particle in region B with a period given by a fundamental

unit of magnetic flux, namely

2~

||= 4135 × 10−7 Gauss-cm2

We emphasize that the interference eff ect discussed here is a purely quantum mechani-

cal. Classically the motion of a charged particle is determined by the Newton’s second

law supplemented by the force law of Lorentz. In this problem the magnetic field is

113

Page 130: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 130/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

confined in the cylinder, and the particle experiences no force. However the vector

potential exists in the outside of cylinder. It seems that the vector potential A is more

fundamental than the magnetic field B. It is to be noted that the observable eff ect

depends on the magnetic flux not A directly. This eff ect has been observed experimen-

tally.

B 2.6.5 Magnetic Monopole

Suppose there is a point magnetic monopole situated at the origin,

B = 2r

which satisfies the equation

∇ · B =4 (r)

The solution for the vector potential,

B = ∇ × A

= r

∙1

sin

( sin ) −

¸+θ

1

∙1

sin

()

¸

+φ1

() −

¸

If there is no singularity in the vector potential, we would have

∇· (

∇× A) = 0

114

Page 131: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 131/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

This violates the assumption, Z B · S =4

The solution I

A =

∙ (1 − cos )

sin

¸φ

The solution is singular at = . We construct a pair of potentials

A( ) =

∙ (1 − cos )

sin

¸φ

for − , and

A( ) = −∙

(1 + cos )

sin

¸φ

for We can get a solution for B, but A is doubly valued. The diff erence of the

vector potential is

A( ) −A( ) = − 2 sin

φ

In the form of the gradient,

∇Λ = ∇(−2 ) = − 2 sin

φ

The the wave functions in two diff erent vector potential will diff er by

Ψ( ) = exp

µ−2

~

¶Ψ

( )

The wave function must be single valued because once we choose particular gauge,

the expansion of the state ket in terms of the position eigenkets must be unique. Let

115

Page 132: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 132/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

us examine the behavior of the wave function Ψ( ), on the equator = 2 with a

definite radius r, which is a constant. When we increase the azimuthal angle along

the equator from 0 to 2, Ψ( ) as well as Ψ( ) must return to its original value because

the two functions must be single-valued. This is possible only if

2

~ = ±

= ±~

2 || ±2

~

2 || · · ·

The elementary magnetic charge must be quantized.

We should emphasize that quantum mechanics does not require the existence

of magnetic monopole.

A 2.7 Interpretation of Wave Function.

B 2.7.1 What’s Ψ()?

Since

| 0 : i =Z

|i h| 0 : i =Z

|iΨ( )

Ψ( ) is regarded as an expansion coefficient of | 0 : i in terms of the position

eigenkets |i. The quantity

( ) = |Ψ( )|2

116

Page 133: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 133/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

is defined as the probability density. So ( ) is the probability that the particle

appears in a narrow range round at time . This is the so-called the probabilistic

interpretation of wave function.

The Continuity Equation.

( )

=

Ψ∗( )

¸Ψ( ) +Ψ

∗( )

Ψ( )

¸

= − 1

~ ( ∗Ψ∗)Ψ+Ψ∗

1

~ Ψ

Assume

= − ~ 22

∇2 +

( ) =

1

2~ (Ψ∗(∇2

Ψ) −Ψ(∇2Ψ∗)) +

1

~ ( − ∗)Ψ∗Ψ

117

Page 134: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 134/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

As

Ψ∗∇2

Ψ = ∇(Ψ∗∇Ψ) − (∇Ψ∗)(∇Ψ)

Ψ∇2Ψ∗ = ∇(Ψ∇Ψ∗) − (∇Ψ)(∇Ψ∗)

= ~

2∇(Ψ∗

∇Ψ

−Ψ

∇Ψ∗) +

1

~

Im( ) ·

+ ∇ · j =

1

~ Im( ) ·

j = − ~

2(Ψ∗∇Ψ−Ψ∇Ψ∗) =

~

Im(Ψ∗∇Ψ)

–—The probability flux.

When is purely real, we have

+ ∇ · j = 0

This is the conservation law for probability.

Question: what happens if V is not real? When is complex, which is of-

ten used for nuclear reaction for particles absorbed by nuclei, it is accounted for thedisappearance of particles.

Except for the probability density, the wave function contains more physics

than expected. Let us write it as

Ψ( ) = ( )12 exp[ ( )~ ]

118

Page 135: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 135/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

with 0 and real.

Ψ∗∇Ψ = 12∇12 +

~ ∇

=⇒ j =

The spatial variation of the phase of the wave function characterizes the probability

flux; the stronger the phase variation, the more intense the flux. The direction of j at

some point is seen to be normal to the surface of a constant that goes through that

point. Since j is a flux, j can be rewritten as

j = (∇) ≡ v

This physical meaning is still unclear. It is not a velocity traditionally!

B 2.7.2 The Classical Limit

Substituting Ψ = 12~ into a Schrodinger equation leads to

−~ 2

2(∇

212 +2

~ ∇12 ·

∇ )

−1

~ 212 |

∇ |2 + (

~

)12

∇2 + 12

= ~ (12

+

~ 12

)

Taking ~ → 0 , we obtain

1

2|∇ ( )|2 + () +

( ) = 0

119

Page 136: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 136/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 2.6: One-dimensional square well potential with (a) perfectly rigid walls (b)

finite potential.

This is the Hamilton-Jacobi equation in classical mechanics. In this sense, the Schrodinger

equation goes back to the classical mechanics in the limit ~ → 0 In the classical me-

chanics ( ) stands for Hamiltonian principal function. In a stationary state with

time dependent − ~ the Hamilton’s principle function S is separable

( ) = () −

120

Page 137: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 137/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

A 2.8 Examples

B 2.8.1 One dimensional square well potential

C Perfect rigid wall

() =

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

0 || ≤

+∞ ||

Since the potential is infinite at || the wave function must vanish at the points

= ± The wave function for || ≤ is simply

− ~ 2

2

2

2=

Introduce a dimensionless quantity =

2

2 = −22

~ 2 = −2

where = (22~ 2)12 The general solution is

( ) = sin + cos

Application of the boundary conditions at = ±, i.e., = 1, gives

sin + cos = 0

− sin + cos = 0

There are two possible classes of solution

121

Page 138: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 138/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

(1). = 0 and cos = 0

= ( +1

2) (2.2)

= cos = cos(2 + 1)

2(2.3)

=~ 2

2

2

2

=(2 + 1)22~ 2

82

(2.4)

(2) = 0 and sin = 0

= (2.5)

= sin = sin

(2.6)

=~ 2

2

2

2 = 2

2~ 2

22 (2.7)

C Finite potential step

() =

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

0 || ≤

0 ||

The wave equation at ||

− ~ 2

2

2

2=

The wave equation at ||

− ~ 2

2

2

2+ 0 =

− ~ 2

2

2

2= ( − 0)

122

Page 139: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 139/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The general solution for 0

() =

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

+

where = [2( 0 − )]12 ~

For 0

() =

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

1 sin + 1 cos

2 sin + 2 cos

The wave equation at || is the same as that in the rigid wall potential, and the

general solution is

( ) = sin + cos

where = (2~ 2)12 We now impose on the solutions (1) and (2) the requirements

that u and du/dx be continuous at x=±.

sin + cos = −

sin − cos = −

− sin + cos = −

sin + cos = −

123

Page 140: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 140/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

from which we obtain

2 sin = ( − )−

2 cos = − ( − )−

2 cos = ( + )−

2 sin = ( + )−

Two classes of solutions

(1) = 0 and =

tan =

(2) = 0 and = −

cot = −

C Parity

The Schrodinger equation

− ~ 2

2

2()

2+ ()() = ()

If the potential is symmetric about = 0, () = (−), we have

− ~ 2

2

2(−)

2+ ()(−) = (−)

124

Page 141: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 141/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

The () and (−) are solutions of the same wave equation with the same eigenvalues

E. Addition or subtraction these two equations gives () ± (−) the solution of the

Schrodinger equation. To simplify the notation, () = ±(−) Such wave function

are said to have even or odd parity. Note that

cos = cos(−)

sin = − sin(−)

B 2.8.2 A charged particle in a uniform magnetic field

Consider a charged particle in a uniform magnetic field. Assume the particle is confined

in a two-dimensional plane, and the magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane, say

along the z direction. The Hamiltonian is given by

=1

2( −

)2

with

= = (

)

To derive the field, we can choose

(1). = − = 0

(2). = −12

= 12

125

Page 142: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 142/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

C Case (1): = − = 0

=1

2

h( −

)2 + ( −

)2

i

=1

2

∙( −

)2 + ( )2

¸

Notice that [ ] = 0 i.e. p is a good quantum number. The general form of the

wavefunction is

Ψ = ()0

The Schrodinger equation Ψ = Ψ is reduced to

1

2∙

( 0 −

)2

+ ( )2¸() = ()

Alternatively

∙ 2

2+

22

22( − 0)2

¸() = ()

with 0 = 0

Thus the problem is reduced to the simple harmonic oscillator.

C Case (2). = −12

= 12

=1

2

h( −

)2 + ( −

)2

i

=1

2

∙( −

2)2 + ( +

2)2

¸

126

Page 143: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 143/374

CHAPTER 2 – MANUSCRIPT

In this case both p and p are not good quantum numbers. We cannot solve this

problem like in the case (1). Take

= −

2;

= +

2

[ ] = −2~ 2

= −~

=1

2

£2 + 2

¤

=1

4[( + )( − ) + ( − )( + )]

[ − + ] =2~

Take

=

r

2~ ( − )

† =

r

2~ ( + )

Thus [ †] = 1

=~

2

¡† + †

¢

=~

µ† +

1

2

¶⇔ ~

µ† +

1

2

Find the wave function for the energy eigenstates.

127

Page 144: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 144/374

CN Chapter 3

CT Theory of Angular Momentum

This chapter is concerned with a systematic treatment of angular momentum and re-

lated topics.

A 3.1 Rotation and Angular Momentum

We consider the rotation in the space of a physical system in a state represented by

a ket |i or the wave function (r) We describe a rotation by a linear operator ,

which is so defined that any vector r is rotated into the new vector · r. The rotation

changes the ket |i into the new ket |0i or change the wave function (r) into the

wave function 0(r0), which means

hr|i = hr|i

128

Page 145: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 145/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

-r¯D+()D()

¯®

= hr|i

hr|0i = hr|i

0(r) = (r)

B 3.1.1 Finite versus infinitesimal rotation

From elementary physics, we know that

(1). Rotations about the same axis commute.

(

6)(

3) = (

3)(

6) = (

3+

6) = (

2)

(2). Rotation about diff erent axes do not commute.

(

2)(

2) 6= (

2)(

2)

Consider a vector V with three components and When we rotate

the vector, we obtain a new vector, V with and . These two vectors are

connected by a 3 × 3 matrix⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

129

Page 146: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 146/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 3.1: Example to illustrate the noncommunativity of finite rotation.

The requirement that the rotated vector be real when the vector are real means

that the elements of are real. The length of the vector and do not change,

which means

( )

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

= 2 + 2 + 2

= =

= = 1

where “T” stands for a transpose of a matrix: = To be definite we consider a

130

Page 147: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 147/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

rotation about axis by an angle

=

= cos − sin (= 0 cos( + ))

= sin + cos (= 0 sin( + ))

where = 0 cos and = 0 sin In the matrix form, we obtain

() =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

cos − sin 0

sin cos 0

0 0 1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

Similarly

() =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 0 0

0 cos − sin

0 sin cos

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

() =

⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

cos 0 sin

0 1 0

− sin 0 cos

⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

We are particularly interested in an infinitesimal form, from which a great deal can be

131

Page 148: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 148/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

learned about the structure of . Take sin ≈ cos ≈ 1 − 2

2 we have

() =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 0 0

0 1 − 22 −

0 1 − 22

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

= 1 + () + (

2

) + · · ·

() =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 − 22 0

0 1 0

− 0 1 − 22

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

() =

⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 − 22 − 0

1 − 22 0

0 0 1

⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 0 0

0 1 − 22 −

0 1 − 22

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 − 22 0

0 1 0

− 0 1 − 22

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 − 22 0

0 1 0

− 0 1 − 22

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 0

0 1 − 22

0

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 −2 − ¡−1

22 + 1

¢2 0 −

¡−12

2 + 1¢

− ¡−1

2 2 + 1¢

+ ¡

12 2 − 1

¢ ¡−12 2 + 1

¢2+¡−1

2 2 + 1¢ ¡

12 2 − 1

¢

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

132

Page 149: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 149/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 −2 0

2 0 0

0 0 0

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

Elementary matrix manipulation leads to

()()−

()() = (2)−

1

If we just remain the quantities of first order in , any two rotations about diff erent

axes commute because (2) ≈ 1

In quantum mechanics

Because rotations aff ect physical systems, the state ket corresponding to a

rotated system is expected to look diff erent from the state ket corresponding to the

original system. Given a rotation operator , characterized by a 3 × 3 matrix , we

associated with an operator D() in the appropriate ket space such that

|i = D() |i

where |i and |i stand for the kets of the rotated and unrotated systems, respectively.

To construct the rotation operator, it is again fruitful to examine first its properties

under an infinitesimal rotation

D(n) = 1 − J · n

~

we define the - component of the angular momentum. A finite rotation can be

133

Page 150: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 150/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

obtained by compounding successively infinitesimal rotation about the same axis

D() = lim →+∞

[D(

)]

= lim →+∞

(1 − ~

·

)

= ∙ lim →+∞

(1−

~

·

) ~ (− )¸−

~

= exp(− ~

)

Definition: lim→+∞

(1 +1

) ≡

In order to obtain the angular momentum commutation relations we need

more concepts. For every , there exists a rotation operator D() in the appropriate

ket space

=⇒ D()

We postulate that D() has the same group properties as R.

1. Identity:

· 1 = =

⇒D() · D(0) = D()

2. Closure:

1 · 2 = 3 =⇒ D(1) · D(2) = D(3)

3. Inverse:

−1 = 1 =

⇒D() · D(−1) = D(0) = 1

134

Page 151: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 151/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

4.Associativity:

1(23) = (12)3

D(1) · D(23) = D(12) · D(3)

As

()() − ()() = (2) − 1

we examine

D()D() − D()D() = D(2) − 1

= (1

~ −

22

2~ 2

)(1

~ −

22

2~ 2

)

−(1 −

~ − 2 2

2~ 2)(1 −

~ − 22

2~ 2)

= −[ ]2~ 2 = D(2) − 1

D(2) = 1 − ~

2

=⇒ [ ] = ~

Similarly, we obtain

[ ] = ~

135

Page 152: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 152/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

or

J × J = ~ J

Comparing with a conventional vector v

v × v = 0

B 3.1.2 Orbital angular momentum

If the vector is of infinitesimal length and only quantities of first order in are

retained, the relation = may be written

= + ×

where

=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 −

1 −

− 1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

136

Page 153: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 153/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

To derive the formula we have used the infinitesimal rotation, for example,

() =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

cos − sin 0

sin cos 0

0 0 1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

= 1 +

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 − 0

0 0

0 0 0

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

and the infinitesimal rotations about any axis are commutable.

Now we wish to find a transformation |i that changes the ket |i into the

ket |i

|i = D() |i

h |i = h |i

=⇒ h| D+() |i = h |i

=⇒ h |i = h |i

=⇒ h |i =-

−1 |®

137

Page 154: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 154/374

Page 155: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 155/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Consider a rotation by a finite angle about the z-axis. If the ket of a spin 1/2 system

before rotation is given by |i the ket after rotation is given by

|i = D() |i

with

D() = −~

To see the physical meaning of D(), we compute

D+ () D()

= ~ −

~ =

~ ~

2(|+i h−| + |−i h+|) −

~

=~

2 |+i h−|

2 + −

2 |−i h+| −

2´=~

2[(|+i h−| + |−i h+|)cos + (|+i h−| − |−i h+|)sin ]

= cos − sin

D†()

⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠D() =

⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

cos − sin

sin + cos

⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

cos − sin 0

sin cos 0

0 0 1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

139

Page 156: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 156/374

Page 157: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 157/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Conclusion: the period for the state ket is twice as long as the period for spin precession:

precession = 2;

state ket = 4

A 3.2 Rotation Group and the Euler Angles

B 3.2.1 The Group Concept

The branch of mathematics that is appropriate for a full treatment of symmetry is the

theory of groups. Here we give a few basic definitions: A set of objects , , ,... form

a group if a process can be defined that enables us to combine any two of the objects,

such as and , to form an object , and if the following conditions are satisfied:

1. All results of combination, such as , are members of the group.

2. The group contains an identity or unit member that has the properties =

= , where is any member of the group.

3. Each member has an inverse −1 also in the group, such that −1 = −1 = .

4. Group combination is associative, so that

() = ()

141

Page 158: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 158/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

The members of the group are called elements. Though we frequently refer to

the combination as “multiplication”, this does not mean ordinary multiplication. For

example, the set of integers, positive, negative, and zero, form a group if the law of

combination is ordinary addition.

A group is abelian if multiplication is commutative, so that = for all

pair of elements. Otherwise the group is non-abelian.

Two groups are said to be isomorphic to each other if there is a unique one-

to-one correspondence between elements of the two groups such that products of cor-

responding elements correspond to each other.

Examples:

(1). The elements are 1 and −1 and the law of combination is multiplication.

(2). 2 = : is the root of = 1

B 3.2.2 Orthogonal Group

We discussed rotations of a vector. The rotated vector and unrotated vector are con-

nected by a 3 × 3 real and orthogonal matrix

=

All rotation matrices form a group.

1. Combination of two 1 and 2 is a new matrix 12

142

Page 159: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 159/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

2. Identity: = 1

3. The inverse matrix: = −1 and = =

4. Associativity:(12)3 = 1(23)

This group is named SO(3), where S stands for special, O stands for orthog-

onal, 3 for three dimension. If the vector is n-dimensional, the R form a SO(n) group.

B 3.2.3 “Special”?

Consider

() =

⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

cos − sin 0

sin cos 0

0 0 1

⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠Its determinant is

det(()) = 1

In fact,

det() = 1 =⇒

” ”

−1 is not one of elements in SO(N). We postulate that D() has the same group

properties of R. The determinant of D() is

det[D()] = det

µexp[−

J · n

~ ]

= exp

∙det(−

J · n

~ )

¸= 1

143

Page 160: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 160/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

since

det[ ] = 0

B 3.2.4 Unitary Unimodular Group

Another rotation we discussed is for the spin 1/2 system, where the rotation matrices

are 2 × 2 We can write a unitary unimodular matrix as

( ) =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

−∗ ∗

⎞⎟⎟⎠

where a and b are complex satisfying ||2 + ||2 = 1 All these matrices form a group.

(1) Closure:

(1 1)(2 2) = (12 − 1∗2 12 + ∗21)

where

|12 − 12|2 + |12 + ∗21|2 = 1

(2) Identity:

(1 0) =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1 0

0 1

⎞⎟⎟⎠

(3) Inverse:

†( )( ) = 1

(4) Associative: multiplications of matrices are associative.

144

Page 161: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 161/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

If we set

Re() = cos

2

Re() = − sin

2

Im() =

− sin

2

Im() = − sin

2

the ( ) can be rewritten as

( ) =⇒ −·2

As det[( )] = 1, this group is called SU(2) group. SU(2) and SO(3) have a two-to-one

correspondence: In SU(2). a rotation by 2 produces −1. a rotation by 4 produces 1.

In SO(3) , a rotation 2 produces 1. More generally, ( ) and (− −) correspond

to one matrix in R (in SO(3))

B

3.2.5 Euler Rotations

To describe a rotation, usually we need three parameters: two parameters for the

rotation axis and one parameter for the rotation angle. In classical mechanics, an

arbitrary rotation of a rigid body can be accomplished in three steps, known as Euler

rotations.

145

Page 162: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 162/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 3.2: Euler rotations.

146

Page 163: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 163/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Three steps:

(a) : R() y → y0

(b) : R0( ) z → z0

(c) : R0( ) y’

→y00

In terms of 3×3 orthogonal matrices the product of the three operations can be written

as

( ) ≡ 0( )0( )()

There appear both rotations about body axes and about the space-fixed axes. This

is rather inconvenient! It is desirable to express the body-axis rotations in terms of

space-fixed axis rotation. Fortunately, we have

0( ) = ()( )−1 ()

0( ) = 0( )( )−10 ( )

Therefore,

( ) = ()( )( )

As an example we calculate D( ) for a spin 1/2 system.

( ) = ()( )( )

= −32 −

22 −

32

147

Page 164: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 164/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Recall that

exp(− ·

2) = cos

2− · sin

2

To prove the identity we use the ( · )2 = 1

( ) =

⎜⎜⎝cos

2− sin

20

0 cos

2 + sin

2

⎟⎟⎠

·

⎛⎜⎜⎝

cos 2

− sin 2

sin 2

cos 2

⎞⎟⎟⎠ ·

⎛⎜⎜⎝

cos 2

− sin 2

0

0 cos 2

+ sin 2

⎞⎟⎟⎠

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

−+2 cos

2−−

−2 sin

2

−−2 sin

2−

+2 cos

2

⎞⎟⎟⎠

A 3.3 Eigenvalues and Eigenkets of Angular Momen-

tum

The commutation relation between three components of J are already derived:

[ ] = ~

[ ] = ~

[ ] = ~

148

Page 165: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 165/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

These relation are often rewritten in a more compact form

× = ~

In this section we work out the eigenvalues and eigenkets of angular momentum. To

this end, we introduce a new set of operators:

(1). 2 = + +

(2). ± = ± , + = ( −)†

2 commutes with all three ( = )

[ 2 ] = 0

As and do not commute, we cannot diagonalize and simultaneously.

However we can choose one to be diagonalized with 2. By convention, we choose

. We denote the eigenvalues of 2 and by and , respectively

2 | i = | i

| i = | i

To determine the values of and , it is convenient to work with the ladder operator,

±.

[ ] = ~

[ ] =

−~

⇒[ ± ] = ±~

149

Page 166: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 166/374

Page 167: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 167/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Note that the bra of ± | i are

h | ( ±)† = h | ∓ = h ± ~ | ∗±( )

h | ∓ ± | i = | ±( )|2

2 can be expressed in terms of ± and

2 =1

2( + − + − +) + 2

= − + + 2 + ~ = + − + 2 − ~

= | +( )|2 + ( + ~ ) = | −( )|2 + ( − ~ )

| +( )|2 = − ( + ~ ) ≥ 0

| −( )|2 = − ( − ~ ) ≥ 0

If | i is one of eigenkets, then

± | i = ±( ) | ± ~ i

If +( ) or −( ) is not equal to zero, | ± ~ i is also one of eigenkets. Suppose

that we keep on applying ± to both side of the equation above. We can obtain

numerical eigenkets with smaller and smaller or larger and larger ± ~ until the

sequence terminates at some max and min such that⎧⎪⎪⎨

⎪⎪⎩

+( max) = 0

−( min) = 0

151

Page 168: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 168/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

So

| +( max)|2 = − max(max + ~ ) = 0

| −( min)|2 = − min(min − ~ ) = 0

= max(max + ~ ) = min(min − ~ )

=⇒ max = −min

Clearly, we must be able to reach | maxi by applying + successively to | mini a

finite number of times. i.e.

| maxi ∝ ( +) | mini ∝ | min + ~ i

We obtain

max = min + ~

As a result,

max =

2

~

and

=

2(

2+ 1)~ 2

It is conventional to define

max = −min =

2~ = ~

152

Page 169: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 169/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

and

| i =⇒ | i

such that

2 | i = ( + 1)~ 2 | i

| i = ~ | i

with = − − + 1

Take ±( ) real, we have

+ | i = [ ( + 1) − ( + 1)]12~ | + 1i ;

− | i = [ ( + 1) − ( − 1)]12~ | − 1i

The eigenkets | i form a basis for angular momentum operator

h | 0 0i = 0 0

In the form of matrix, elements of ±

h 00 | ±| i = ~ [ ( + 1) − ( ± 1)]12 0 0±1

As a result,

153

Page 170: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 170/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

h 00 | | i =

¿ 00

¯¯ + + −

2

¯

À

=~

2[ ( + 1) − ( + 1)]12 0 0+1

+~

2

[ ( + 1)

−(

−1)]12 0 0

−1

h 00 | | i

=~

2[ ( + 1) − ( + 1)]12 0 0+1

− ~ 2

[ ( + 1) − ( − 1)]12 0 0−1

h 0 | | i = ~ 0;

- 0

¯ 2

¯

®= ( + 1)~ 2 0

Our choice of a representation in which 2 and are diagonal has led to discrete

sequences of values for the corresponding labels j and m. The infinite matrices thus

obtained are most conveniently handled by breaking them up into an infinite set of

finite matrices, each of which is characterized by a particular value of and has 2 + 1

rows and columns.

154

Page 171: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 171/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

(1) = 12: = ±12

= ~ 2

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 1

1 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ = ~

2

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 −

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

= ~ 2

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1 0

0

−1

⎞⎟⎟⎠

2 = 34~ 2

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1 0

0 1

⎞⎟⎟⎠

(2) = 1 = ±1 0

= ~

212

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 1 0

1 0 1

0 1 0

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

= ~

212

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 − 0

− 0 −

0 0

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

= ~

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝1 0 0

0 0 0

0 0 −1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠ 2 = 2~ 2

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝1 0 0

0 1 0

0 0 1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

(3) = 32

= ±32

± 12

= ~ 2

⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 312 0 0

312 0 2 0

0 2 0 312

0 0 312 0

⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

155

Page 172: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 172/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

=~

2

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 −312 0 0

−312 0 −2 0

0 2 0 −312

0 0 312 0

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

=~

2

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

3 0 0 0

0 −1 0 0

0 0 −1 0

0 0 0 −3

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

2 =15

4~ 2

⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1 0 0 0

0 1 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 0 0 1

⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

B 3.3.1 Representation of Rotation Operator

Have obtained the matrix elements of and ±, we are now in position to study the

matrix elements of rotation operator D( )

D( )0() =

- 0

¯− ·~

®

Since [ 2 ] = 0 we have

[D() 2] = 0

156

Page 173: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 173/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

So D() | i is still an eigenket of 2 with the same eigenvalue ( + 1)~ 2

2D() | i = ( + 1)~ 2D() | i

We just consider the matrix elements of D() with the same . For every there are

2 + 1 values of m. D() should be a (2 + 1) × (2 + 1) square matrix. For a rotated

ket

() | i =X0

| 0i h 0 |()| i =X0

( )0() | 0i

As is well known, the Euler angles may be used to characterize the most general rotation.

We have

( )0( ) =

D 0

¯−

~ −

~ −

~ ¯

E

= (0− )

D 0

¯−

~ ¯

E

For = 12

=~

2

⎜⎜⎝0 −

0

⎟⎟⎠

nD 0

¯−

~ ¯

Eo=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

cos 2

− sin 2

sin 2

cos 2

⎞⎟⎟⎠

= cos

20 − sin

2

157

Page 174: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 174/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

To derive the matrix we can make use of the identity: ( )2 = 14

For = 1,

=~

212

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0 − 0

0 −

0 0

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

D

0¯−

~ ¯

E =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

cos2 2

− 1212

sin sin2 2

1212

sin cos − 1212

sin

sin2 2

1212

sin cos2 2

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

To derive the matrix we can make use of the identity: ( )3 =

A 3.4 Schwinger Oscillator Model.

There exists a very interesting connection between the algebra of angular momentum

and the algebra of two independent simple harmonic oscillators. Let us consider two

types of oscillator: plus and minus type. The creation and annihilation operator are

denoted by ± and †± , respectively,

[+ †+] = 1 [− †

−] = 1

These two oscillators are uncoupled,

[+ †−] = [− †

+] = 0

158

Page 175: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 175/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Define the number operators

+ = †++; − = †

−−

We have

[ + +] =

−+; [

−] =

−−

[ + †+] = +; [ − †

−] = †−

Since [ + −] = 0 , we define the simultaneous eigenket of + and − by |+ −i

such that

|+ −i =

Ã(†

+)+

(+!)12

!Ã(†−)−

(−

!)12

!|0 0i

with

± |0 0i = 0

†+ |+ −i = (+ + 1)12 |+ + 1 −i

|+ −

i = (−

)12 |+ − −

1i

We define

+ ≡ ~ †+−; − ≡ ~ †

−+

≡ ~

2(†

++ − †−−) =

1

2~ [ + −] =

~

2( + − −)

159

Page 176: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 176/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

We can prove that these operators satisfy the angular momentum relations

[ ±] = ±~ ±

Define the total number operator by

= + + −

we can prove

2 = 2 +1

2( + − + − +)

=~ 2

4( + − −)2 +

~ 2

2(†

+−†−+ + †

−+†+−)

=

~ 2

4 [ 2

+ + 2− − 2 + − + 2 +(1 + −) + 2 −(1 + +)]

=

2(

2+ 1)~ 2

Therefore, we have

2 |+ −i = ~ 2+ + −

2(

+ + −2

+ 1) |+ −i

+ |+ −i = ~ †+− |+ −i

= ~ [(+ + 1)−]12 |+ + 1 − − 1i

− |+ −i = ~ [+(− + 1)]12 |+ − 1 − + 1i

|+ −i =~

2(+ − −) |+ −i

160

Page 177: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 177/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

These expression can be reduced to the familiar forms for angular momentum provided

that

+ =⇒ +

− =⇒ −

|+ −i =⇒ | i =(†

+) +

[( + )!]12

(†−) −

[( − )!]12|0 0i

So we can check

2 | i = ( + 1)~ 2 | i

+ | i = [ ( + 1)

−(

−1)]12

~ | + 1i

− | i = [ ( + 1) − ( − 1)]12~ | − 1i

| i = ~ | i

B 3.4.1 Spin 1/2 system

We define the spin 1/2 operators ± and in terms of the creation and annihilation

operators † and ( =↑ ↓). For = 12

↑ + ↓ = 2 = 1

161

Page 178: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 178/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

We have two eigenkets for

|+i = †↑ |0i

|−i = †↓ |0i

The operators are expressed as

+ = ~ †↑↓

− = ~ †↓↑

=~

2(+↑ ↑ − +

↓ ↓)

Since [↑ †↑] = [↓ †

↓] = 1, we usually call and † the boson operators. In the case

of = 12 2 = (†

)2 = 0 So they are called hard-core bosons since no two bosons

can be occupied at the same site.

Please check whether the commutation relations still hold if

n↑ †

↑o

= ↑†↑ + †

↑↑ = 1

n↓ †↓o = 1

n↓ †

↑o

= 0

i.e., are fermionic operators.

Quantum statistics can be introduced by making use of commutation and

anticommutation relation of these operators.

162

Page 179: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 179/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

B 3.4.2 Two-spin—1/2 system

We now consider two-spin-1/2 system: 1 and 2 For each ( = 1 2) we have

|+i = †↑ |0i

|−i = †↓ |0i

There are four possible configurations for combination of two spins

|1+ 2+i = |1+i ⊗ |2+i = †1↑†

2↑ |0i

|1+ 2−i = |1+i ⊗ |2−i = †1↑†

2↓ |0i

|1−

2+i = |1−

i⊗

|2+i = †1↓†

2↑

|0i

|1− 2−i = |1−i ⊗ |2−i = †1↓†

2↓ |0i

We are now in a position to construct eigenstates of the total spin

S = S1 + S2

and its − component

S = S1 + S2

We first examine the two kets: |1+ 2+i and |1− 2−i.

S |1+ 2+i = (S1 + S2) |1+ 2+i = ~ |1+ 2+i

S2 |1+ 2+i = 2~ 2 |1+ 2+i

163

Page 180: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 180/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

We denote

| = 1 = 1i = |1+ 2+i = †1↑†

2↑ |0i

Similarly,

| = 1 = −1i = |1− 2−i = †1↓†

2↓ |0i

Recall that

− | i = [ ( + 1) − ( − 1)]12~ | − 1i

| = 1 = 0i =1

212~ S− | = 1 = 1i =

1

212(†

1↑†2↓ + †

1↓†2↑) |0i

We have obtained three eigenkets for 2 and . There should exist another eigenket

since there are four possible configurations for two spins. The fourth eigenket must be

a combination of |1+ 2−i and |1− 2+i

|i = |1+ 2−i + |1− 2+i

It is easy to check

|i = 0

We make use of property of orthogonality of eigenkets

h = 1 = 0 | i = 0

From this equation, we obtain

= − =⇒ = − =1

212

164

Page 181: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 181/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Furthermore,

S2 |i = 0 =⇒ |i = | = 0 = 0i =1

212(†

1↑†2↓ − †

1↓†2↑) |0i

| = 0 = 0i =1

212(†

1↑†2↓ − †

1↓†2↑) |0i

B 3.4.3 Explicit Formula for Rotation Matrices.

Schwinger’s scheme can be used to derive in a very simple way, a closed formula for

rotation matrices. We apply the rotation operator D() to | i. In the Euler angle

rotation the only non-trivial rotation in the second one about y- axis. So

D() = D( )= =0 = − ~

Applying D() on | i, we have

D() | i

= D()(†

+) +

[( + )!]12

(†−) −

[( −

)!]12|0i

=[()†

+−1()] +

[( + )!]12

[()†−−1

()] −

[( − )!]12D() |0i

=1

2( + − −) =

1

2(†

+− − †−+)

We have

|0i = 0

165

Page 182: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 182/374

Page 183: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 183/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

D()

⎛⎜⎜⎝

†+

†−

⎞⎟⎟⎠D−1() =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

cos 2

sin 2

− sin 2

cos 2

⎞⎟⎟⎠⎛⎜⎜⎝

†+

†−

⎞⎟⎟⎠

Recalling the binomial theorem,

( + ) = X=0

!

!( − )! −

D() | i =[cos

2†

+ + sin 2

†−] +

[( + )!]12×

[cos 2

+− − sin

2+

+] −

[( − )!]12|0i

=X0

( )0( ) | 0i

( )

0

= X (−1)

−+0 [( + )!(

−)!( + 0)!(

−0)!]12

( + − )!!( − − 0)!( − + 0)

×(cos

2)2 −2+−0

(sin

2)2−+0

Notice that ( )0( ) = h 0| D() | i

A 3.5 Combination of Angular Momentum and Clebsh-

Gordan Coefficients

One of the important problems in quantum theory is the combination of the angular

momenta associated with two parts of a system (such as the spin and orbital angular

momenta of one electron) to form the angular momentum of the whole system. The

167

Page 184: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 184/374

Page 185: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 185/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

It is noted that

J × J = ~ J

Since J2J21J2

2 and J are compatible, we denote their simultaneous eigenkets by

| 1 2 i ≡ | i

Recall that there are (2 1 +1) eigenkets | 11i and (2 2 +1) eigenkets | 22i Therefore

there are (2 1 + 1) × (2 2 + 1) kets

| 1 2 1 2i ≡ | 1 1i ⊗ | 2 2i (≡ |1 2i)

These kets form a complete and orthogonal set of basis:

1X1=− 1

2X2=− 2

|1 2i h1 2| = 1

The connection between | i and |1 2i is

| i =X12

|1 2i h1 2| i

h1 2| i are the Clebsh-Gordan coefficients. Note that

(J − J1 − J2) | i = 0

( − 1 − 2) h1 2| i = 0

It is apparent that h1 2| i is zero unless = 1 + 2. The largest value of m

is 1 + 2 and this occurs only when 1 = 1 and 2 = 2 Therefore the largest is

169

Page 186: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 186/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

1 + 2 , and that there is only such a state

| 1 + 2 1 + 2i = | 1 2i

| = 1 + 2 = 1 + 2i = |1 = 1 2 = 2i

The next largest value of m is 1 + 2 − 1 and this occurs twice: when (1) 1 = 1 and

2 = 2 − 1 and (2) 1 = 1 − 1 and 2 = 2 One of the two linear independent

combination of these two states ( = 1 + 2 − 1) must be associated with the new

state with = 1 + 2 and = 1 + 2 − 1 Since for each value there must be values

of m ranging from 1 + 2 to − 1 − 2 . The other combination is associated with =

1 + 2 − 1 By an extension of this argument we can see that each j value, ranging from

1 + 2 to | 1 − 2| by integer steps, appears just once. Each value is associated with

2 + 1 combinations of the original kets

1+ 2X =| 1− 2|

(2 + 1) = (2 1 + 1)(2 2 + 1)

which is equal to the number of |1 2i as expected.

B 3.5.1 Clebsch-Gordan coefficients

The Clebsch-Gordan coefficients form a unitary matrix. Furthermore the matrix ele-

ments are taken to be real by convention. An immediate consequence is h |1 2i =

h1 2| i The orthogonality conditions of the matrix are

170

Page 187: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 187/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

(1). h1 2|01 0

2i = 10

1 20

2

X

h1 2| i h |01 0

2i = 10

1 20

2

(2). h | 0 0i = 0 0

1

P1=− 1

2

P2=− 2h |1 2i h1 2| 0 0i = 0 0

(3). h |1 2i 6= 0 only if = 1 + 2

Recursion Relations

We apply ± to the left side of Eq.

| i =

2X0

1=− 1

2X0

2=− 2|0

1 02i h0

1 02| i

+ | i =

2X0

1=− 1

2X0

2=− 2( 1+ + 2+) |0

1 02i h0

1 02| i

[ ( + 1) − ( + 1)]12 | + 1i

=P

[ 1( 1 + 1) − 01(0

1 + 1)]12

|01 + 1 0

2i h01 0

2| i

+

P[ 2( 2 + 1) − 2(2 + 1)]12 |0

1 02 + 1i h0

1 02| i

Multiplying h1 2| from the left side

[ ( + 1) − ( + 1)]12 h1 2| + 1i

= [ 1( 1 + 1) − 1(1 + 1)]12 h1 − 1 2| i

+ [ 2( 2 + 1)

−2(2 + 1)]12 h1 2

−1| i

171

Page 188: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 188/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Similarly,

[ ( + 1) − ( − 1)]12 h1 2| − 1i

= [ 1( 1 + 1) − 1(1 − 1)]12 h1 + 1 2| i

+ [ 2( 2 + 1)

−2(2 + 1)]12 h1 2 + 1| i

Construction Procedure

Combination of the two recursion relations and the orthogonality conditions

can leads to all Clebsch-Gordan coefficients . We start with the sector with the largest

value of m :

(1) = 1 + 2 = 1 + 2

h1 = 1 2 = 2| = 1 + 2 = 1 + 2 i = 1

(2) = 1 + 2 − 1

(a) 1 = 1 2 = 2 − 1

(b) 1 = 1 − 1 2 = 2

= 1 + 2

= 1 + 2 − 1

| 1 + 2 1 + 2 i = | 1 2i

172

Page 189: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 189/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

[( 1 + 2 )( 1 + 2 + 1) − (( 1 + 2 )( 1 + 2 − 1)]12 | 1 + 2 1 + 2 − 1i

= [ 1( 1 + 1) − 1( 1 − 1)]12 | 1 − 1 2i + [ 2( 2 + 1) − 2( 2 − 1)]12 | 1 2 − 1i

h 1 − 1 2| 1 + 2, 1 + 2 − 1i = µ1

1 + 2¶12

h 1 2 − 1| 1 + 2, 1 + 2 − 1i =

µ2

1 + 2

¶12

h1 2| 1 + 2 − 1 1 + 2 − 1i

These two coefficients are determined by the orthogonality conditions h − 1| − 1 − 1i =

0

h 1 + 2 1 + 2 − 1| 1 2 − 1i h 1 2 − 1| 1 + 2 − 1 1 + 2 − 1i

+ h 1 + 2 1 + 2 − 1| 1 − 1, 2i h 1 − 1 2| 1 + 2 − 1 1 + 2 − 1i

= 0

µ 2

1 + 2¶12

h 1 2

−1| 1 + 2

−1 1 + 2

−1i

+

µ1

1 + 2

¶12

h 1 − 1, 2| 1 + 2 − 1 1 + 2 − 1i = 0

=

µ1

1 + 2

¶12

=

µ2

1 + 2¶12

173

Page 190: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 190/374

Page 191: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 191/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

In this construction procedure, the only difficult part is the use of orthogonally,

which becomes progressively more complicated as the rank of the submatrix increases.

However it needs be employed only once for each submatrix, and it is easier to work

out an example with particular numerical values for 1 and 2 than the general case

just considered.

(a) J− | 1 + 2 1 + 2 − 1i

h 1 2 − 2| 1 + 2 1 + 2 − 2i =

∙2(2 2 − 1)

( 1 + 2)(2 1 + 2 2 − 1)

¸ 12

h 1 − 1 2 − 1| 1 + 2 1 + 2 − 2i =

∙4 1 2

( 1 + 2)(2 1 + 2 2 − 1)

¸ 12

h 1 − 2 2| 1 + 2 1 + 2 − 2i =∙ 1(2 1

−1)

( 1 + 2)(2 1 + 2 2 − 1)¸12

(b) J− | 1 + 2 − 1 1 + 2 − 1i

h 1 2 − 2| 1 + 2 − 1 1 + 2 − 2i =

∙1(2 2 − 1)

( 1 + 2)( 1 + 2 − 1)

¸ 12

h 1 − 1 2 − 1| 1 + 2 − 1 1 + 2 − 2i =1 − 2

[( 1 + 2)( 1 + 2 − 1)]12

h 1 − 2 2| 1 + 2 − 1 1 + 2 − 2i = −∙

2(2 1 − 1)

( 1 + 2)( 1 + 2 − 1)

¸12

175

Page 192: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 192/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

A 3.6 Spin Correlation Measurements and Bell’s In-

equality

Anybody who is not shocked by quantum theory has not understand it. – Niels Bohr

B 3.6.1 Spin singlet state

| = 0i = (|+; −i − |−; +i)√

2

Suppose we make a measurement on one of spin component A then make

another measurement on B.

If spin 1 is z-up. spin 2 must be z-down, and vice vrese.

| = 0i = (|+; −i − |−; +i)√

2

If spin 1 is z-up, we measure spin 2 along x direction. What is the result?

50% x-up and 50% x-down.

To sum up:

• If A measures S and B measures S there is a completely randaom correlation

between the two measurements.

• If A measures S and B measures S there is a 100% (opposite sign) correlation

between the two measurements.

176

Page 193: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 193/374

Page 194: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 194/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

reproduced if the particle 1 and 2 are matched as follows

Particle 1 Particle 2

(+ −) ↔ (− +)

(+ +) ↔ (− −)

(

− +)

↔(+

−)

(− −) ↔ (+ +)

with equal populations, that is 25% each. Suppose a particular pair belong to type

(+ −) and observer A decides to measure S of particle 1; then he or she neces-

sarily obtains a plus sign regardless of whether B decides to measure S or S. In

this sense that Einstein’s locality principle is incorportaed in this model: A’s results is

predetermined independently of B’s choice as to what to measure.

More complicated situations: we start with three unit vectors a, b, and c

178

Page 195: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 195/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Population Particle 1 Particle 2

1 (+ + +) (− − −)

2 (+ + −) (− − +)

3 (+ − +) (− + −)

4 (+ − −) (− + +)

5 (− + +) (+ − +)

6 (− + −) (+ − +)

7 (− − +) (+ + −)

8 (− − −) (+ + +)

(1: a+, 2: b+): 3 + 4

(1: a+, 2: c+): 2 + 4

(1: c+, 2: b+): 3 + 7

(+; +) ≤ (+; +) + (+; +)

This is Bell’s inequality, which follows from Einstein’s locality principle.

B 3.6.3 Quantum Mechanics and Bell’s Inequality

In quantum mechanics, assume the angle between a and b.

(+; +) =1

2sin2

2

179

Page 196: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 196/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

where the factor 1/2 arises from the probability of initially obtaining S1 ·a. From Bell’s

equality,

sin2 2

≤ sin2 2

+ sin2 2

If we take = 2 = 2 = 2, the inequality is then violated for

0 2

Nature has had the last laugh on EPR. Nearly thirty years after the EPR

paper was published, an experimental test was proposed that could be used to check

whether or not the picture of the world which EPR were hoping to force a return to

is valid or not. It turns out that Nature experimentally invalidates that point of view,

while agreeing with quantum mechanics.

A 3.7 PROBLEM

1. Find the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 −

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

. Suppose an electron

is in the spin state

⎛⎜⎜⎝

⎞⎟⎟⎠ If is measured, what is the probability of the result

~ 2?

2. Let n be a unit vector in a direction specified by the polar angles ( ). Show

180

Page 197: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 197/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

that the component of the angular momentum in the direction n is

L = sin cos L + sin sin L + cos L

=1

2sin

¡−L+ + L−

¢+ cosL

If the system is in simultaneously eigenstates of L2 and L belonging to the

eigenvalues ( + 1)~ 2 and ~ i.e., | i

(a) what are the possible results of a measurement of L?

(b) what are the expectation values of L and L2?

3. Obtain an explicit expression for

(φ) = exp(−φn · S~ )

in the form of a 2 × 2 matrix when S is the spin operator with = 12 Let the

unit vector n have the polar angles and Show explicitly that your matrix for

(φ) is unitary and that it is equal to −1 when = 2

4. Prove a sequence of Euler rotations represented by

(12)( )

= exp³−

23

´exp

µ−

22

¶exp

³−

23

´

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

−(+ )2 cos 2

−(− )2 sin 2

−(− )2 sin 2

(+ )2 cos 2

⎞⎟⎟⎠

181

Page 198: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 198/374

CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT

Because of the group properties of rotations, we expect that this sequence of

operations is equivalent to a single rotation about some axis by an angle . Find

5. Calculate the matrix of Clebsch-Gordan coefficients in the case of 1 = 12 and

2 = 12 According to the matrix, write explicitly the eigenstates of the total

angular momentum and its z component in terms of ( 1 1) and ( 2 2)

6. Use the raising or lowering operator to find the following Clebsch-Gordan coeffi-

cients ¯¯

3

2

1

2

À= |1 1i ⊗

¯¯

1

2 −1

2

À+ |1 0i ⊗

¯¯

1

2

1

2

À

182

Page 199: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 199/374

CN Chapter 4

CT Symmetries in Physics

Symmetry is a fundamental attribute of the natural world that enables an investigator

to study particular aspects of physical systems by themselves. For example, the as-

sumption that space is homogeneous, or possesses translational symmetry, leads to the

conclusion that the linear momentum of a closed isolated system does not change as the

system moves. This makes it possible to study separately the motion of the center of

mass and the internal motion of the system. A systematic treatment of the symmetry

properties and the conservation law are useful in solving more complicated problems.

It provides a deeper insight into the structure of physics.

In this chapter we consider the geometrical symmetries that may be associated

with the displacements of a physical system in space and time, with its rotation and

inversion in space, and with the reversal of the sense of progression of time.

183

Page 200: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 200/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

A 4.1 Symmetries and Conservation Laws

B 4.1.1 Symmetry in Classical Physics

An alternative way to describe a classical system is to introduce Lagrangian L:

L

˙ −

L

= 0

which is called the Lagrange equation. For a conservative system,

L = T − V

where

V = V ( 1 2 )

For example, the Lagrangian for a harmonic oscillator is

L =1

22 − 1

22

From the Lagrange equation, we obtain

= −

This is the Newtonian equation of motion! When the potential is related to velocity or

generalized velocity, the Lagrangian is constructed in a diff erent way. For instance, the

Lagrangian for a charged particle subjected to an electromagnetic field

L = T − +

·

184

Page 201: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 201/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

If the Lagrangian is unchanged under displacement in the general sense,

→ +

i.e.,

L

= 0

from the Lagrange equation, it follows that

= 0

where that canonical momentum is defined as

= L

˙

In other words, the canonical momentum is conserved, i.e. the law of conservation.

B 4.1.2 Symmetry in Quantum Mechanics

In quantum mechanics, we have learned to associate a unitary operator, say U, with an

operation like translation and rotation. It has become customary to call U a symmetry

operator regardless of whether the physical system itself possesses the symmetry to U.

When we say that a system possesses that symmetry to U, which implies that

† =

185

Page 202: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 202/374

Page 203: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 203/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

B 4.1.3 Degeneracy

Suppose that

[ ] = 0

for the symmetry operator and |i is an energy eigenket with eigenvalue . Then,

|i is also an eigenket of H with the same energy eigenvalue.

G Proof.

|i = |i = |i

Suppose |i and |i represent two diff erent kets. Then these two states with the

same energy are said to be degenerated.

Remark 3 The proof is very trivial, but the concept plays a far more important role

in quantum mechanics.

B 4.1.4 Symmetry and symmetry breaking

If |i is non-degenerated, |i and |i must represent the same physical state although

they can diff er a trivial phase factor, i.e.,

|i = |i

In the case, we say that the state |i also possesses the symmetry. If

|i 6= |i

187

Page 204: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 204/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

we say that the symmetry is spontaneously broken in the state although the Hamil-

tonian possesses the symmetry. The spontaneous symmetry breaking occurs when the

state is degenerated. The spontaneous broken symmetry is one of the most impor-

tant concepts in modern physics, from elementary particle physics to condensed matter

physics.

In 1960 Nambu was the first one to introduce the concept of spontaneous

symmetry breaking to elementary physics. To begin with he first worked on supercon-

ductivity. Then he applied the concept to elementary particles, which becomes one of

the corner stones of the physics of elementary particles, the standard model. Nambu

was awarded Nobel prize in 2008..

EXP Example 1

for a hydrogen atom problem,

=1

2 2 + ()

The Hamiltonian is rotational invariant

[() ] = 0

One of eigenstates is denoted by |i with . Then

() |i =X0

( )0 |0i

188

Page 205: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 205/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

is also an eigenket of with the same energy . For each pair of

and there are 2 + 1 values of :

= − − + 1

Therefore |i should be at least (2 + 1)-fold degenerated.

EXP Example 2

Two-spin Problem

The Hamiltonian for two spins S1 and S2 is written as

= S1 · S2

Denote the eigenstate for H by | i

| i =

2

£(S1 + S2)2 − S2

1 − S22

¤| i

=

2[ ( + 1) − 2( + 1)] | i

The total spin can be

= 2 2 − 1 0

As the M can be taken to be

= − − + 1

189

Page 206: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 206/374

Page 207: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 207/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

(2) 0, = 2

| = 2 = 0i 6= | = 2 = 0i

The ground state is (2 + 1)-fold degenerate. The symmetry is

spontaneously broken.

B 4.1.5 Summary: symmetries in physics

Space Translation → + Momentum

Time evolution → + Energy

Rotation → 0 Angular Momentum

Space Inversion → − Parity

Time reversal → − Charge conjugate

Permutation (12) → (21) Quantum Statistics

Gauge Ψ→eΨ Charge

C Space translation

† (ρ)r (ρ) = r + ρ

(ρ) = exp[−P

~ · ρ]

† (ρ) (ρ) =

[P ] = 0

191

Page 208: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 208/374

Page 209: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 209/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

A 4.2 Discrete Symmetries

In this section we consider two symmetry operators that can be considered to be discrete

B 4.2.1 Parity

Figure 4.1:

The parity operation, as applied to transformation on the coordinate system,

changes a right-handed (RH) system into a left-handed (LH) system. Let us denote the

parity operator Π, which satisfies

⎧⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎩

|i → Π |i

Π†Π = −

Π = 0

Π†Π = 1

Π†Π = 1− Π

† = Π−1 = Π

193

Page 210: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 210/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

The physical meaning is that under this operation

= () ⇒ 0 = (− − −)

0 =

where

=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

−1 0 0

0 −1 0

0 0 −1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠How does an eigenket of the position operator transform under parity?Assume

|i = |i

Π |i = Π |i = Π |i

−Π |i = Π |i

(Π |i) = − (Π |i)

Thus we conclude that

Π |i = − |−i

Applying the parity operation twice

Π2 = Π (−Π) = Π2

and

Π2 |i = Π2 |i = Π2 |i

194

Page 211: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 211/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

Thus

Π2 = 1

Therefore its eigenvalue can be only +1 or −1.

Example: a simple harmonic oscillator

B 4.2.2 The Momentum Operator

Space translation followed by parity is equivalent to parity followed by translation in

the opposite direction:

ΠT () |i = Π | + i

= |− − i

= T (−) |−i

= T (−)Π |i

Since

T () = 1 − ~

+

it follows that

Π = − Π

or

Π = 0

195

Page 212: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 212/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

Example: a free particle

B 4.2.3 The Angular Momentum

Define

L = ×

then

ΠL = LΠ

For 3 × 3 matrices, we have

( )() = ()( )

where

( ) =

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

−1 0 0

0 −1 0

0 0 −1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

which implies that parity and rotation operation commute. Therefore

Π() = ()Π

() = 1 − · + · · ·

196

Page 213: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 213/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

Π = Π

Π = Π

Π = Π

Example: the hydrogen atom

B 4.2.4 Parity

Let us now look at the parity property of wave function whose state ket is |i :

Ψ() = h|i

Suppose |i the eigenket of parity

Π |i = |i ( = ±1)

Then

h|Π |i = h |i

h− |i = h |i

Ψ(−) = Ψ()

The wave function is also parity.

EXP Example 3

197

Page 214: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 214/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

Solution for a square-well potential

− ~ 2

2

2 ()

2= ()

with || ≤ In the replacement → −,

−~ 2

2

2 (−)

2

= (−

)

Thus if () is one solution, (−) must be also one solution. The

solutions are

() = ±·

where 2 = 2 2 We can construct

Odd Parity: () − (−) = ()

Even Parity: () + (−) = ()

Thus the wave functions are sin ~ and cos ~ respec-

tively.

EXP Example 4

Simple harmonic oscillator: The basic Hamiltonian is

=2

2+

1

222

We have

Π† Π =

198

Page 215: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 215/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

and

Π†xΠ = −x

Π†pΠ = −p

⎫⎪⎪⎬⎪⎪⎭

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩Π††

Π = −†

Π†Π = −

The eigenkets are

|i =1

! ¡†

¢

|0i

The ground state wave function is

h|0i =1

120exp

∙−1

2

2

20

¸

So

h|0i = h−|0i

How about h|i?

h|Π|i = (−1) h|i

h−||i = (−1) h|i

At = 0, we have h = 0|i = 0 for odd .

EXP Example 5

Double well potential

Let us now look at the parities of energy eigenstates.

199

Page 216: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 216/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

Polar vector: vectors that are odd under parity such as x, p etc

Axial vector or pseudovectors that are even under parity such as J.

Pseudoscalar: scalars that are odd under parity S · x.

Theorem 4 Suppose [Π] = 0 and |i is an eigenstate of H with eigenvalue

|i = |i

then (a) if |i is nondegenerate, Π |i is also a parity eigenket; (b) if |i is degenerate,

Π |i may not be a parity eigenket.

G Proof. We can construct two states

1

2

(1 ±Π) |i

These two states are parity eigenstates with eigenvalues ±1

Π1

2(1 ±Π) |i =

1

2

¡Π±Π

|i

= ±1

2(1 ±Π) |i

where the identity Π2 = 1 has been used. Furthermore the states 12

(1 ±Π) |i and |i

must represent the same state otherwise there would be two states with the same energy.

This violating the condition of non-degeneracy.

B 4.2.5 Lattice Translation

200

Page 217: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 217/374

Page 218: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 218/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

and commute with each other. So can be diagonalized with simultaneously.

is unitary, but not hermitian. †() 6= () We expect the eigenvalue to be a complex

number of modulus 1.

Before we determine the energy eigenkets and eigenvalues of it is instructive

to see a special case of the periodic potential when the barrier height between the two

adjacent lattice sites is made to go to infinite as shown in Figure. Denote |i a state

ket in which the particle is localized at the site. When is applied to it

() |i = | + 1i

To construct an eigenket for , we consider a linear combination

|i =

+∞X=−∞

|i

This state is an eigenstate for

() |i =+∞X=−∞

() |i =+∞X=−∞

| + 1i

= −+∞

X=

−∞

(+1) | + 1i

() |i = − |i

B 4.2.6 A more realistic example: a 1D system

Assume that the barrier potential is still very large, but finite. The overlap of two states

at nearest neighbor sites is very small, and all other overlaps can be ignored. That is

202

Page 219: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 219/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

h| |i = 0

h| | ± 1i = −

and all other elements are equal to zero. That is

|i = 0 |i − | + 1i − | − 1i

=X

0 |i h| − | + 1i h| − | − 1i h|

|i =X

0 |i h| − | + 1i h| − | − 1i h| |i

= ( 0 − 2 cos ) |i

The skill used here is the Fourier transform.

Periodic condition: |i = | + i

|i = X=0

|i

= X=0

| + i

= − X=0

( +) | + i

− = 1 = 2 = 2 ( = 0 1 · · · − 1)

203

Page 220: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 220/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

A 4.3 Permutation Symmetry and Identical Particles

B 4.3.1 Identical particles

Identical particles cannot be distinguished by means of any inherent properties, since

otherwise they could not be identical in all respects. In classical mechanics the existence

of sharply definable trajectories for individual particles makes it possible in principles to

distinguish between particles that are identical except for their path since each particle

can be followed during the course of an experiment. In quantum mechanics, the finite

size and the spreading of the wave packets that can describe individual particles often

make it impossible to distinguish between identical particles because of their positions,

especially if they interact with each others to an appreciable extent.

C Distinguishable and indistinguishable identical particles

Two identical particles are indistinguishable if the wave functions for the two particles

overlap, and distinguishable if the wave functions do not overlap.

C Permutation Symmetry

Let us consider the Hamiltonian of a system of two identical particles.

=1

2 21 +

1

2 22 + (|1 − 2|) + (1) + (2)

Symmetry: to exchange the positions of two particles: 1 ⇔ 2, the Hamiltonian

204

Page 221: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 221/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

is invariant

⇐⇒

Define the permutation operator

12 |1i1 ⊗ |2i2 = |2i1 ⊗ |1i2

†12 (1 2) 12 = (2 1)

Clearly

12 = 21

212 = 1

Consider a state ket for two particles:

|i1 ⊗ |0i2

12 |i1 ⊗ |0i2 = |0i1 ⊗ |i2

We can construct two states

12 [(|i1 ⊗ |0i2 ± |0i1 ⊗ |i2)]

which are eigenstates of 12 with eigenvalues ±1, respectively.

Our consideration can be extended to a system made up of many identical

particles

|1 2 · · · · · · · · · i = |1 2 · · · · · · · · · i

205

Page 222: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 222/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

Clearly

2 = 1

just as before, and the allowed eigenvalues of are ±1 It is important to note that,

in general

[ ] 6= 0

C Connection between spin and statistics

Half-odd-integer spin particles are fermions: electrons, protons, · · ·

Integer spin particles are boson: mesons, 4He nucleus,· · ·

Although the allowed values of are ±1, system containing N identical

particles are either totally symmetrical or antisymmetric under the interchange of any

pair.

Boson:

| i = | i

Fermions

| i = − | i

It is empirical fact that a mixed symmetry does not occur.

206

Page 223: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 223/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

C The Pauli exclusion principle

An immediate consequence of the electron being a fermion is that the electrons must

satisfy the Pauli exclusion principle, which states that no two electrons can occupy the

same state.

Let us consider a system containing N electrons without interaction

(1 2 · · · ) = 0(1) + 0(2) + · · · + 0( )

Assume () are the wave functions of 0() with energy

0() () = ()

The product of N one-particle eigen functions are the energy eigen wave function of

total system..

(1 2 · · · ) = (1) () · · · ( )

= ( + + · · · + )

As electrons are fermions, we have to express the wave function in an antisymmetric

207

Page 224: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 224/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

form. One way is to express as a determinant of the U’s

(1 2 · · · )

= det

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

(1) (2) · · · ( )

(1) (2) · · · ( )

.

.....

.. .

.

..

(1) (2) · · · ( )

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

This function is antisymmetric and satisfies the Schrodinger equation with energy

+ + · · · +

If two or more of the U’s are the same,

(1 2 · · · ) = 0

which is the so-called Pauli exclusion principle.

To simplify the notation we introduce the creation and annihilation operator

† and such that

0† |0i = † |0i

|0i = 0

† + † = 1

†† + †† = 0

208

Page 225: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 225/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

for fermions.

† − † = 1

†† − †† = 0

for bosons. The Shcrodinger equation can be reduced to

| i = ( + + · · · + ) | i

with

| i = †† · · · † |0i

EXP Example 6

Two-particle problem

A system contains two particles, which is described by the

Hamiltonian

= 1 + 2

where

1 =1

21 21 +

1

212

1

2 =1

22 22 +

1

222

2

(1) 1 6= 2, 1 6= 2

(2) 1 = 2, 1 = 2

209

Page 226: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 226/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

B 4.3.2 Two electrons

B 4.3.3 The helium atom

A 4.4 Time Reversal

In this section we study a discrete symmetry, called time reversal. The terminology

was first introduced by E. Wigner in 1932.

B 4.4.1 Classical cases

Let us first look at the classical case: a motion of particle subjected to a certain force.

Its trajectory is given by the Newtonian equation of motion,

2r

2= −∇ ()

If r() is the solution of the equation, then r(−) is also the solution of the equation.

In another word, when we make a transformation → −, the Newtonian equation

of motion keeps unchanged. Of course we should notice the change of the boundary

condition or initial conditions for the problem.

The Maxwell equations and the Lorentz force

F = (E + v × B)

210

Page 227: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 227/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

are invariant under the time reversal provided that

v → −v

j → − j

B → −B

E → E

∇ · D =1

0

∇ · B = 0

∇ × H− D

=

∇ × E + B

= 0

where D = 0E + P and H = B0 −M

The Schrodinger equation

~ Ψ( )

= (− ~

2

2∇2 + )Ψ( )

Ψ( −) is not a solution of the equation because of the appearance of the first order

time derivative and the imaginary sign at the left hand side. However, Ψ∗( −) is a

solution.

211

Page 228: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 228/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

Definition: the transformation

|i → |i = |i | i →¯ E

= | i

is said to be antiunitary if

D |E = h |i∗ ;

(1 |i + 2 | i) = ∗1 |i + ∗2 | i

In this case the operator is antiunitary operator.

Usually an antiunitary operator can be written as

=

where is a unitary operator and is the complex conjugator operators.

B 4.4.2 Time reversal operator Θ

Let us denote the time reversal operator by Θ Consider

|i → Θ |i

where Θ |i is the time reversed state. More appropriately, Θ |i should be called the

motion-reversed state. For a momentum eigenstate |pi Θ |pi should be |−pi up to

a possible phase. Θ is an anti-unitary operator. We can see this properties from the

Schrodinger equation of a time reversal invariant system.

212

Page 229: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 229/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

~

Ψ( ) = Ψ( )

Θ~

Θ−1ΘΨ( ) = Θ Θ−1

ΘΨ( )

Θ~

Θ−1 = ~

;Θ Θ−1 =

provided that ΘΘ−1 = − and Θ Θ−1 =

(−)

ΘpΘ−1 = −p

ΘxΘ−1 = x

ΘJΘ−1

= −J (= x × p)

Check the invariance of the fundamental commincation relation

Θ£xp

¤Θ−1 = ~

From the spherical harmonic ( ) we have

( ) → ( ( ))∗ = (−1) − ( )

Θ | i = (−1) | −i

213

Page 230: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 230/374

Page 231: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 231/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

On the other hand,

| −i = − ~ − (+)~ |+i = − ~ − ~ − ~ |+i

Noting that acting on |+i gives |+i We have

Θ = − ~ =

Θ |+i = + |−i

Θ |−i = − |+i

Θ2 = −1

Θ(+ |+i + − |−i) = ∗+ |+i − ∗− |−i

Θ(∗+ |+i − ∗− |−i) = − (+ |+i + − |−i)

In general

Θ= −

Θ2 = (−1)2

Kramers degeneracy: the ground state for the odd number of electrons in a

time-reversal invariant system has at least double degeneracy.

Time reversal symmetry and energy conservation

215

Page 232: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 232/374

CHAPTER 4 – MANUSCRIPT

2

2= −2 +

216

Page 233: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 233/374

CN Chapter 5

CT Approximation Methods for Bound

States

As in the case of classical mechanics, there are relatively few physically interesting prob-

lems in the quantum mechanics which can be solved exactly. Approximation methods

are therefore very important in nearly all the applications of the theory. In this chapter

we shall develop several approximation methods.

Approximation methods can be conveniently divided into two groups, accord-

ing to whether the Hamiltonian of the system is time-independent or time-dependent.

217

Page 234: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 234/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

A 5.1 The Variation Method

The variation method can be used for the approximate determination of the lowest or

ground-state energy level of a system when there is no closely related problem that is

capable of exact solution, so that the perturbation method is inapplicable. The most

famous achievements of the variational method in modern physics are the BCS theoryfor superconductivity and Laughlin’s theory for fractional quantum Hall eff ect.

Why are we so interested in the lowest energy states?

The third law of thermodynamics: "As a system approaches absolute zero, all

processes cease and the entropy of the system approaches a minimum value."

B 5.1.1 Expectation value of the energy

We attempt to estimate the ground state energy by considering a trial ket,¯0®

or a

trial wave function. To this end we first prove a theorem of a great of importance. We

define the expectation value such that

=-0¯ ¯0®-

0|0®

Then we can prove the following

Theorem 5 The expectation value of a trial state ket is always not less than the ground

state energy

≥ 0

218

Page 235: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 235/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

G Proof. We can always imagine that any trial state can be expanded as

¯0®

=X

|i-

|0®

where |i is an exact eigenket of H. The expectation value

= -0

¯

¯0

®-0|0® = P -

0|

®h| |i

-|0

®-0|0®

=

P

-0|® -

|0®

-0|0® ≥

P

-0|® -

|0®

0-0|0® = 0

In the last step we use the property ≥ 0

The variation method does not tell us what kind of trial state ket are to

estimate the ground state energy. Quite often we must appeal to physical intuition. In

practice, we characterize the trial state ket by one or more parameters can compute

as a function of Then we minimize the by setting the derivatives with respect

to the parameters zero

= 0

The result of the variation method is an upper limit for the ground state energy of the

system, which is likely to be close if the form of the trial state ket or the trial wave

function resembles that of the eigenfunction. Thus it is important to make use of any

available information such as symmetry analysis or physical intuition in choosing the

trial function.

219

Page 236: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 236/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

B 5.1.2 Particle in a one-dimensional infinite square well

We attempt to estimate the ground state energy of the infinite-well (one-dimensional

box) problem defined by

=

⎧⎪⎪⎨

⎪⎪⎩

0 for || ;

+

∞ for

The exact solution are, of course, well known:

h|0i =1

12cos

³

2

´

0 =

µ~ 2

2

¶µ2

42

But suppose we did not know these. Evidently the wave function must vanish at

= ± Further the ground state should have even parity. The simplest analytic wave

function that satisfies both requirements is

h|0i = 2 − 2

There is no variational parameter. We can compute as follows

=R h0|i 2

2 h|0iR h0|i h|0i

=10

2 0 ≈ 10132 0

A much better result can be obtained if we use a more general trial function

h|0i =

−||

220

Page 237: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 237/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

where is regarded a variational wave parameter. Straightforward algebra gives

=( + 1) (2 + 1)

2 − 1

~ 2

42

which has a minimum at

=1 + 612

2≈ 172

This gives

=5 + 2612

2 0 ≈ 100298 0

The state with an odd parity?

h|0i = ( − )

B 5.1.3 Ground State of Helium Atom

We use the variation method with a simple trial function to obtain an upper limit for

the energy of the ground state of the helium atom. The helium atom consists of a

nucleus of charge +2 surrounded by two electrons, we find that its Hamiltonian is

=

~ 2

2 ¡∇21 +

∇22¢

−22

µ1

1+

1

2

¶+

2

12

= 1 + 2 + 12

where r1 and r2 are two position vectors of two electrons with respect to the nucleus

as origin, and 12 = |r1

−r2| If we neglect the interaction energy 2

12between the two

221

Page 238: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 238/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

electrons, the ground state wave function of H would be product of two normalized

hydrogenic wave functions

Ψ (r1 r2) = 3

30

−(0)(1+2) (5.1)

with 0 = ~ 22 and = 2

Why is the wave function symmetric in the above equation? Spin singlet in

the ground state.

Why = 2?

We shall use Eq.(5.1) as the trial wave function and permit Z to be the vari-

ation parameter. The kinetic energy of each electron is

1 = Z r1r2Ψ∗ (r1 r2)µ−~ 2

2∇21¶Ψ (r1 r2) =

2

2

20

The Coulomb energy of each electron is

1 =

Z r1r2Ψ

∗ (r1 r2)

µ−22

1

¶Ψ (r1 r2) = −22

0

The interaction energy of two electrons is

= Z r1r2Ψ∗ (r1 r2)µ

2

12

¶Ψ (r1 r2) = −5

2

80

Here we make use of the formula

1

12=

1

1

∞X=0

µ2

1

¶ (cos ) 1 2

1

12=

1

2

X=0

µ1

2

¶ (cos ) 2 1

222

Page 239: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 239/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

where is the spherical harmonics and is the angle of these two vectors.

Totally, the expectation value of the Hamiltonian is

=2 2

0− 42

0+

52

80

=2

0

µ 2 − 27

8

=2

0

"µ − 27

16

¶2

−µ

27

16

¶2#

The expectation is minimized at

= 2716 ≈ 169

and

= −µ2716¶2

2

0= −285

2

0

The experimental value for a helium atom is 290420 so our estimation is about

1.9% higher.

A 5.2 Stationary Perturbation Theory: Nondegener-

ate Case

B 5.2.1 Statement of the Problem

In this section we shall discuss the Rayleigh-Schrodinger perturbation theory, which

analyses the modifications of discrete energy levels and the corresponding eigenfunctions

223

Page 240: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 240/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

of a system when a perturbation is applied.

We consider a time independent Hamiltonian H such that it can be split into

two parts, namely

= 0 +

The perturbation theory is based on the assumption that when = 0, both the exact

eigenvalues (0) and the exact energy eigenkets

¯(0)

®of 0 are know

0¯(0)

®= (0)

¯(0)

®

We are required to find approximate eigenkets and eigenvalues for the full Hamiltonian

problem

( 0 + ) |i = |i

In general, is not the full potential operator. We expect that the is not very

“large” and should not change the eigenvalues and eigenkets of 0 very much.

It is customary to introduce a parameter such that we solve

( 0 + ) |i = |i

instead of the original one. We take 0 ≤ ≤ 1 The case of = 0 corresponds to the

unperturbed problem and the case of = 1 corresponds to the full strength problem

we want to solve.

224

Page 241: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 241/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

B 5.2.2 The Two-State Problem

Before we embark on a systematic presentation of the basic method, let us see how the

expansion in might indeed be valid in the exactly soluble two-state problem we have

encountered many times already. Suppose we have a Hamiltonian that can be written

as

= 0 +

= (0)1

¯1(0)

® -1(0)

¯+ (0)

2

¯2(0)

® -2(0)

¯

+ 12

¯1(0)

® -2(0)

¯+ 21

¯2(0)

® -1(0)

¯where (0)

and ¯(0)® are the exact eigenvalues and eigenstates for 0. The index “0”

stands for the unperturbed problem. We can also express the Hamiltonian by a square

matrix

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

(0)1 12

21 (0)2

⎞⎟⎟⎠

What is the eigenvalues of ?

1 = (0)1 + (0)2

2+⎡⎣Ã (0)1 − (0)2

2

!2

+ 2 12 21

⎤⎦12

;

2 =

(0)1 +

(0)2

2−⎡⎣Ã

(0)1 −

(0)2

2

!2

+ 2 12 21

⎤⎦

12

So this problem can be solved exactly. Let us suppose is small compared with

the relevant energy scale, the diff erence of the energy eigenvalues of the unperturbed

225

Page 242: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 242/374

Page 243: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 243/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

The perturbed wave function and energy level are written

|i =¯(0)

®+

¯(1)

®+ 2

¯(2)

®+ · · · ;

= (0) + (1)

+ 2 (2) + · · ·

and are substituted into the wave equation to give

( 0 + )¡¯

(0)®

+ ¯(1)

®+ 2

¯(2)

®+ · · ·

¢

(0) + (1)

+ 2 (2) + · · ·

¢×¡¯

(0)®

+ ¯(1)

®+ 2

¯(2)

®+ · · ·

¢

Since the Equation is supposed to be valid for a continuous range of , we can equate

the coefficients of equal powers of on the both sides to obtain a series of equations

that represent successively higher orders of the perturbation.

¡ 0 − (0)

¢ ¯(0)

®= 0 (5.3)

¡ 0 − (0)

¢ ¯(1)

®= ( (1)

− )¯(0)

®(5.4)

¡ 0 −

(0)

¢ ¯(2)® = (

(1)

− ) ¯(1)® +

(2)

¯(0)® (5.5)¡ 0 − (0)

¢ ¯(3)

®= ( (1)

− )¯(2)

®+ (2)

¯(1)

®+ (3)

¯(0)

®(5.6)

...

Zero-order perturbation

227

Page 244: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 244/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

The Eq. (5.3) means that¯(0)

®is one of the unperturbed eigenkets, as

expected. We can obtain it directly by taking = 0. The eigenvalue is (0) Since we

are dealing with the perturbation of a bound state, the state ket¯(0)

®is discrete. It

is assumed to be nondegenerate as well, although others of unperturbed eigenkets may

be degenerate or continuously distributed in energy.

First-order perturbation

Multiplying an eigen bra of the unperturbed Hamiltonian from the left hand

on both sides of the Eq.(5.4), we obtain

-(0)

¯ ¡ 0 − (0)

¢ ¯(1)

®=

-(0)

¯( (1)

− )¯(0)

®(5.7)

-(0)¯ ¡ 0 − (0)

¢ ¯(1)® =-

(0)¯ ( (1) − ) ¯(0)® (5.8)

where 6= . The Eq. (5.7) gives

(1) =

-(0)

¯ ¯(0)

®=

It is convenient to calculate

¯(1)

®by expanding it in terms of the unperturbed eigenkets

¯(1)

®=X

(1)

¯(0)

®

where the summation runs over all possible eigenkets of 0. To simplify the notation,

we define

=-

(0)¯¯

¯¯(0)

®

228

Page 245: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 245/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

From the Eq.(5.5),

¡ 0 − (0)

¢X

(1)

¯(0)

®= ( (1)

− )¯(0)

®X

(1)

¡ (0) − (0)

¢ ¯(0)

®= ( (1)

− )¯(0)

®multiplying -(0)¯ from the left hand side, we obtain

(1) =

(0) −

(0)

Second-order perturbation

The second-order correction to the energy is

(2) =

-(0)

¯ ¯(1)

® = X6=

(0)

(0)

Similarly, we expand¯(2)

®in terms of the unperturbed eigenkets

¯(2)

®=X

(2)

¯(0)

®

To calculate (2) , we apply

-(0)

¯from the left hand on both side of the Equation and

obtain

-(0)

¯ ¡ 0 − (0)

¢ ¯(2)

®=-

(0)¯

( (1) − )

¯(1)

®+-

(0)¯

(2)

¯(0)

®

That is

(2) =

1

(0) − (0)

©-(0)

¯( (1)

− )¯(1)

®+-

(0)¯

(2)

¯(0)

®ª

Summary

229

Page 246: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 246/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

In short, the explicit expression for the energy expansion is

= (0) + + 2

X6=

(0) −

(0)

+ · · ·

The expansion of the perturbed eigenket is as follows

|i = ¯(0)®+

X6=

(0) − (0)

¯(0)

®

+2X6=

X6=

(0) −

(0)

ln

(0) −

(0)

¯(0)

®

−2

X6=

(0) −

(0)

(0) −

(0) ¯

(0)

®+ · · ·

Remark 6 The state ket |i is not normalized. A normalized state ket should be

1

h|i|i

A 5.3 Application of the Perturbation Expansion

To illustrate the perturbation method we developed in the last lecture, let us look

at several examples. All examples can be solved analytically. We can compare the

perturbation results with the exact results.

230

Page 247: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 247/374

Page 248: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 248/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

The eigenvalues are

= ~ (1 + )12

µ +

1

2

In the perturbation approach, we just concern about the ground

state energy. The first order perturbation is

1 = h0| 0 |0i = h0|1

222 |0i =

4~

The second order perturbation is

2 =X6=0

|h| 0 |0i|2

0 − =

|h2| 0 |0i|2

0 − 2= − 2

16~

Thus the perturbation correction to the ground state energy is

4 = ~

µ

4− 2

16+ 0(3)

Compare it with the exact result.

EXP Example 2

0 =

This problem can also be solved exactly:

= 0 + 0 =2

2+

1

222 +

=2

2+

1

22( − 0)2 − 1

222

0

232

Page 249: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 249/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

where

0 = −

2

Making a replacement, = − 0 and = , we have

= − ~ 2

2

2

2+

1

222 − 1

222

0

The eigenvalues are

= ~

µ +

1

2

¶− 2

22

The first order perturbation is

1 = h0| 0 |0i = 0

The second order perturbation is

2 =X6=0

|h| 0 |0i|2

0 −

=|h1| 0 |0i|2

0 − 1

= − 2

22

B 5.3.2 Atomic hydrogen

The Schrodinger equation for a hydrogen atom is

(−~ 2

2∇2 − 2

)Φ = Φ

233

Page 250: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 250/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

In the spherical coordinates,

∇2 =1

2

µ2

¶+

1

2 sin

µsin

¶+

1

2 sin2

2

2

The wave function can be written as

Φ = () ( )

where ( ) is a spherical harmonic. (See Schiff , P.76 or Sakurai, P. 454). It is the

eigenfunction for orbital angular momentum operators

2 ( ) = ( + 1)~ 2 ( )

( ) = ~ ( )

First several :

00 =1√ 4

; 10 =

r 3

4cos

1±1 = ∓r

3

8sin ±

The Schrodinger equation is reduced to

∙−~

2

2

µ1

2

µ2

¶− ( + 1)

2

¶− 2

¸ =

The solution of this equation is

= − 24

2~ 22= − 22

202

234

Page 251: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 251/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

where = 0 + + 1 and 0 = ~ 22 The first three radial functions are

10 =

µ

0

¶32

2−0

20 =

µ

20

¶32µ2 −

0

¶−20

21 = µ

60¶32

0 −20

Degeneracy

= 1: the ground state is nondegenerate

= 2: the first excited state is four-fold degenerate. (1) = 0 and = 0; (2)

= 1 and = −1 0 +1

EXP Example 3

Gravitational energy shift

Let consider an ordinary hydrogen atom (proton + elec-

tron) whose unperturbed Hamiltonian is

0 = −~ 22

∇2 − 2

where = ( + ) is the reduced mass. Now the proton

and electron interact not only through the electrostatic potential,

but also by means of the gravational interaction. The perturbation

235

Page 252: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 252/374

Page 253: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 253/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

Needless to say, it is not necessary to calculate higher order correc-

tion in the present case.

B 5.3.3 Quantum well

Exact solution for the square quantum well.

A 5.4 Stationary Perturbation Theory: Degenerate

Case

Until now we have assumed that the perturbed state diff

ers slightly from an unperturbedbound state. The perturbation method for a nondegenerate case we developed fails

when the unperturbed state are degenerate.

B 5.4.1 Revisited two-state problem

Starting from the two-state Hamiltonian

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

(0)1 12

21 (0)2

⎞⎟⎟⎠

237

Page 254: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 254/374

Page 255: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 255/374

Page 256: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 256/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

are two states, |i and |i, that have the same unperturbed energy. Then we cannot

apply the nondegenerate perturbation formula when = unless it happens that

= 0. We first consider the case in which 6= 0 the initial state is not specified

by its unperturbed energy; the state may be |i or |i or any linear combination of

them. Let us suppose that the perturbation removes the degeneracy in some order,

so that for finite there are two states that have diff erent energy. We start from the

perturbation equations in the last lecture

¡ 0 − (0)

¢ ¯(0)

®= 0 (5.11)

¡ 0 − (0)

¢ ¯(1)

®= ( (1)

− )

¯(0)

® (5.12)

Out of infinite number of combinations of the two states we choose the particular pair

which depends on From the Eq.(5.11), we obtain

|i = ¯(0)

®+

¯(0)

®;

(0) = (0)

= (0)

Substitute the combined state into the Eq.(5.12) and take the inner product of this

equation successively with¯(0)

®and

¯(0)

®, we obtain

¡ − (1)

¢ + = 0

¡ − (1)

¢ + = 0

240

Page 257: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 257/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

The two solutions of this equation are

(1) =

1

2( + ) ±

1

2

£( − )2 + 4 | |2¤12

These two solutions are equal if and only if

=

= 0

In this case we say the degeneracy is not removed in the first order perturbation and

we have to consider the second order perturbation. On the other hand if either or both

of two equations are not satisfied, the two valued of (1) are distinct, and each can be

used to calculate and . In this case, we can use the nondegenerate perturbation

theory to determine the higher order perturbation. The coefficients (1) are determined

by

(1) ( (0)

− (0) ) = − − ln

for 6= if we assume that (1) = (1)

= 0

How to solve triplet degenerate problem?

The basic procedure of the degenerate perturbation theory:

(1) Identify degenerate unperturbed eigenkets and construct the perturbation

matrix , a × matrix if the degeneracy is g-fold.

(2) Diagonalization the perturbation matrix by solving, as usual, the appro-

priate secular equation.

241

Page 258: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 258/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

(3) Identify the roots of secular equation with the first-order energy shifts; the

base kets that diagonalize the matrix are the correct zero-order kets to which the

perturbed kets approach in the limit → 0;

(4) For higher orders use the formulas of the corresponding nondegenerate

perturbation theory except in the summations, where we exclude all contributions from

the unperturbed kets in the degenerate subspace.

B 5.4.3 Example: Zeeman Eff ect

The change in the energy levels of an atom caused by a uniform external magnetic

field is called the Zeeman eff ect. We now consider the change of first order in the field

strength for a hydrogen atom

A constant magnetic field can be represented by the vector potential

A =1

2B × r

since B = 5×A and the gauge is ∇·A = 0 The energy related to the vector potential

is

=1

2(p−

A)2

4 =~

A · 5+

2

2A2

= −

2B · L +

2

8222 sin2

242

Page 259: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 259/374

Page 260: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 260/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

A valence electron experience an electric field,

E = −1

∇ ()

Whenever a moving charge is subjected to an electric field, it "feels" an eff ective mag-

netic field,

= −v

× E

The interaction energy related to the electron spin and the eff ective magnetic field

= − · B

=S

·

µp

×

1

−∇ ()

=S

·µ p

×1

r

()

=1

22

1

()

L · S

Consider the relativistic quantum correction, the spin-orbit coupling is only half of the

above term.

Weak field: is dominant.

Strong field: the Zeeman splitting is dominant.

B 5.4.5 Example: First Order Stark Eff ect in Hydrogen

The change in the energy levels of an atom caused by a uniform external electric field

of strength E is called the Stark e ff ect . The perturbation is now the extra energy of

244

Page 261: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 261/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

the nucleus and electron in the external field and is ready shown to be

= cos

where the polar axis and E are in the direction of positive and is again a positive

quantity. In a hydrogen atom the Coulomb potential is rotationally invariant. The wave

function for any spherically symmetric ponetial energy, when expressed in spherical

harmonics, have even or odd parity according as the azimuthal quantum number is

even or odd. Since the perturbation is odd parity with respect to inversion, the ground

state has even parity and has no first-order Stark eff ect. The first excited state ( = 2)

of hydrogen is four fold degenerate; the quantum numbers and have the value

(0 0), (1 −1), (1 0), (1 1). Since the perturbation commutes with the z-component

of angular momentum,

[ ] = 0

we obtain

( − ) h | |0 i = 0

245

Page 262: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 262/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

The nonvanishing matrix elements of are

1 = h1 0| |0 0i = h0 0| |1 0i

=

Z r∗210(r) cos 200( r)

=

1640 Z

+1

−1

cos2 cos Z ∞

0

(2

0

)−0

= −30

The first order energy correction is determined by the secular equation¯¯¯¯¯

− 1 1 0 0

1

− 1 0 0

0 0 − 1 0

0 0 0 − 1

¯¯¯¯¯

= 0

The four roots of the secular equation are

1 =

⎧⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪⎩

− | 1|

0

0

+ | 1|

so that half of the four fold degeneracy is removed in the first order.

246

Page 263: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 263/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

A 5.5 The Wentzel-Kramers-Brillouin (WKB) approx-

imation

The Wentzel-Kramers-Brillouin approxiamtion is for the approxiamte treatment of the

Shrodinger wave equation that shows its connection with the Bohr-Sommerfeld quan-

tization rules. It is based on an expansion of the wavefunction in powers of ~ , which,

although of a semiconvergent or asymptotic character, is nevertheless also useful for

the approximate solution of quantum-mechanical problems in appropriate cases.

A 5.6 Time-dependent Problem: Interacting Picture

and Two-State Problem

When the Hamiltonian depends on the time, there are no stationary solution of the

Schrödinger equation. Thus our identification of a bound state with a discrete energy

level and stationary eigenket must be modified.

B 5.6.1 Time-dependent Potential and Interacting Picture

We consider a Hamiltonian such that is can be split into two parts,

= 0 + ()

247

Page 264: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 264/374

Page 265: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 265/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

=X

∙~

()

¸− ~ |i +

X

()

∙~

− ~ |i

=X

∙~

()

¸− ~ |i +

X

() − ~ |i

= ( 0 + ())

"X

()− ~ |i

#

=X

() − ~ |i + ()X

()− ~ |i

we obtain X

∙~

()

¸− ~ |i = ()

X

()− ~ |i

~

=

X

h| |i ~ =X

h| |i (5.15)

where the Bohr frequency is defined as

= − ~

This equation is exactly equivalent to the original problem.

Interaction picture

Two kinds of changes have been made in going from Eq. (5.13). First, we

have changed the representation from specified in terms of the coordinates to being

specified in terms of the unperturbed energy eigenvalues. Second, we have changed

from the Schrodinger to the interaction picture.

h| |i = h| 0~ − 0~ |i

= h| |i − ~

249

Page 266: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 266/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

The equations in the interaction picture

~

| 0 i = () | 0 i

~

= [ 0]

B 5.6.2 Time-dependent Two-State Problem

Exact soluble problem of time-dependent potential are rather rare. However, a two

state problem with sinusoidal oscillating potential can be solved exactly.

The Problem is defined by

0 = 1 |1i h1| + 2 |2i h2| ( 2 1)

() = |1i h2| + − |2i h1|

In the interaction picture, the Eq. (5.15) can be written as

~

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1()

2()

⎞⎟⎟⎠

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 4

−4 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1()

2()

⎞⎟⎟⎠

The equation is reduced to

~

1() = 42() (5.16)

~

2() = −41() (5.17)

where 4 = + 1

− 2

250

Page 267: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 267/374

Page 268: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 268/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

then the probability for being found in each of the two states is given by

|2()|2 = 2

2 + ( + 12)2~ 24sin2

µ1

2

|1()|2 = 1 − |2()|2

This is Rabi’s formula, after I.I. Rabi.

Spin Magnetic Resonance

The two-state problem has many physical applications: Spin magnetic reso-

nance, maser etc. Consider a spin 1/2 system subjected to a t-independent uniform

magnetic field in the z-direction and, in addition, a t-dependent magnetic field rotating

in the xy plane.

= 0 + 1( cos + sin )

with 0 and 1 constant.

We treat the eff ect of the uniform t-independent field as 0 and the eff ect of

the rotating field as ()

0 = −~ 0

2 (|+i h+| − |−i h−|)

() = −~ 1

2[cos (|+i h−| + |−i h+|) + sin (− |+i h−| + |−i h+|)]

= −~ 1

2

£− |+i h−| + + |−i h+|

¤

252

Page 269: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 269/374

Page 270: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 270/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

Four Nobel Prize winners who took advantage of resonance in two-level sys-

tems

• Rabi (1944): on molecular beams and nuclear magnetic resonance;

• Bloch and Purcell (1952): on B field in atomic nuclei and nuclear magnetic mo-

ments;

• Townes, Basov, and Prochorov (1964): on masers, lasers, and quantum optics;

• Kastler (1966): on optical pumping

A

5.7 Time-dependent Perturbation Problem

B 5.7.1 Perturbation Theory

We now return to Eq. (5.3), replace by , and express the as the power series

in

= (0) + (1)

+ 2(2) + · · ·

The substitution yields the set of equations

(0) = 0

~

(+1) =

X

h| |i () + ~

254

Page 271: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 271/374

Page 272: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 272/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

B 5.7.2 Time-independent perturbation

The result takes particular simple form if the perturbation is independent of time,

except for being switched on suddenly at a given time.

() =

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

0 for 0

for 0

We then obtain

(1) = −

~ h| |i

(1) = h| |i

1 − ~

= h| |i 2~

− 2~

− 2~

= −2 2~ h| |isin( 2~ )

Hence

−~

|i = (1 + (~ )−1

Z −∞

h| () |i )−~

|i

≈ (+ )~

|i

This is in agreement with the result using the stationary perturbation theory. The first

order transition probability from to is given by

(1) = 4 h| |i2

µsin( 2~ )

¶2

256

Page 273: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 273/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

It is worth noting that this is valid for nondegenerate case.

In the case of = 0:

sin( 2~ )

=

2~

the probability is

(1) = 1

~ 2h| |i2 2

B 5.7.3 Harmonic perturbation

Eq. (5.18) takes a particularly simple form if the perturbation depends harmonically

on the time except for being turned on at one time and off at a latter time. We shall

call these two times 0 and 0, respectively, and assume that we can write

h| () |i = h| |i sin

where h| |i is time independent. The first order amplitude at any time at or after

0

(1)

= −h| |i

~ µ(+)0

−1

+ −(−)0

−1

− ¶The structure of Eq. (??) suggests that the amplitude is appreciable only when the

denominator of one or the other of the two terms is particularly zero. The first term

is important when ≈ − and the second term is important when ≈ + For

the present, we specialize to a situation in which the initial state is a discrete bound

257

Page 274: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 274/374

CHAPTER 5 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 5.3:

state and the final state is one of a continuous set of dissociated states. The first order

probability of finding the system in the state |i after the perturbation is removed is

¯(1) ( 0)

¯2=

4 |h| |i|2

~ 2×

sin2 [( − ) 02]

( − )2 (5.19)

B 5.7.4 The Golden Rule

The factor sin2 [( − ) 02] ( − )2 is plotted in Figure. The height of the

main peak increases in proportional to 20. Thus if there is a group of states |i that

have energy nearly equal to + ~ , and for which |h| |i| is roughly independent

of , the probability of finding a system in one or another of these states is proportional

to 0.

258

Page 275: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 275/374

Page 276: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 276/374

CN Chapter 6

CT Collision Theory

Problems for which the energy eigenvalues are continuously distributed usually arise in

connection with the collision of a particle with a force field. In a collision problem the

energy is specified in advance, the behavior of the wave function at great distance is

found in terms of it. This asymptotic behaviors can then be related to the amount of

scattering of the particle by the force. There are so few systems of physical interest for

which exact solutions can be found that approximation methods play an important part

in applications of the theory. Various methods that are useful in scattering problems

are considered in this chapter.

260

Page 277: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 277/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 6.1:

A 6.1 Collisions in one- and three-dimensions

B 6.1.1 One-dimensional square potential barriers

We consider first the one-dimensional collision of a particle with the square potential

barrier. In this problem we are interested in a particle that approaches from the region

of negative x and is reflected or transmitted by the carrier. In the corresponding

classical problem, the particle is always reflected if its energy is less than that of the

top of the barrier, and it is always transmitted if the energy is great. We shall see that,

in the quantum problem, both reflection and transmission occur with finite probability

for most energies of the particle.

Asymptotic behaviors

We are interested in representing a particle that approaches from the left with

energy 0 and may be turned back by the potential barrier or penetrate through

261

Page 278: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 278/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

it. Thus the asymptotic behavior in the region where () = 0 is as follows: for 0

we want the wave function to represent a particle moving to the left (reflected particle)

as well as to the right (incident particle): for , we want the wave function to

represent only a particle moving to the right (transmitted particle).

The wave function in the region where () = 0 is

− ~ 2

2

2

2 =

Our asymptotic solution are

() = + − 0

() =

where

= ~ =

µ2

~ 2

¶12

Normalization

Recall the definition of the possibility current density

= ~ 2

[Ψ∗∇Ψ− (∇Ψ∗)Ψ]

The possibility current densities at 0 and are

() =~

¡||2 − ||2¢ 0

() =~

| |2

262

Page 279: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 279/374

Page 280: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 280/374

Page 281: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 281/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 6.2: The transmission coefficient of a square barrier.

B 6.1.2 Datta-Das spin field transistor

In 1990, Datta and Das proposed....

A 6.2 Collision in three dimensions

Scattering cross section

The angular distribution of particles scattered by a fixed center of force or by

other particles is conveniently described in terms of a scattering cross section . Suppose

that we bombard a group of particles or scattering centers with a parallel flux of

particles per unit time and count the number of incident particles that emerge per unit

time in a small solid angle 40 (?) centered about a direction that has polar angles

0 and 0 with respect to the bombarding direction as polar axis. This number will

265

Page 282: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 282/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

be proportional to , and 40 provided that the flux is small enough so that there

is no interference between bombarded particles and no appreciable diminution of the

bombarded particles by their recoil out of the target region, and provided also that the

bombarded particles are far enough apart so that each collision process involves only

one of them.

The diff erent scattering cross section 0(00): the number of incident parti-

cles that emerge per unit time in 40 can be written

0(00)40

The total scattering cross section:

0 =Z

0(00)0

For a collision of a particle with a fixed scattering center, the definition of the diff erential

scattering cross section is equally valid in the laboratory and center-of-mass coordinate

systems, since a scattering center that is fixed has an infinite eff ective mass and so

that the center of mass of the system does not move. For a collision between two

particles of finite mass, however, the diff erential cross section applies in general only

to the laboratory coordinate system and to the observation of the scattered incident

particle. It does not describe in the observation of the recoil bombarded particle in the

laboratory system, although it is of course possible to obtain a diff erential cross section

for the recoil particle from 0(00)

266

Page 283: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 283/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 6.3:

267

Page 284: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 284/374

Page 285: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 285/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

Relation between cross sections

The relation between the cross section in the laboratory and center-of-mass

coordinate systems can be obtained from the definitions, which imply that the same

number of particles are scattered into diff erential solid angle 0 about 0 0 as are

scattered into about

0(0 0)sin 000 = ( )sin

With the help of the relation 0 0 and , we obtain

0(0 0) =(1 + 2 + 2 cos )

12

|1 + cos |( )

It should be noted that the total cross section is the same for both laboratory andcenter-of-mass systems and also for both the outgoing particles, since the total number

of collision that takes place is independent of the mode of description of the process.

Dependence on = 1

2

For = 1,

tan 0 =sin

+ cos

= tan

2

Thus 0 = 2 and varies from 0 to 2 as varies from 0 to ; in this case

0(0 0) = 4 cos 0(20 0)

and no particle appear in the backward hemisphere in the laboratory system.

For 1, 0 increase from 0 to as increase from 0 to .

269

Page 286: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 286/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

For 1, 0 first increase from 0 to a maximum value cos−1(−1 ), which

is less than 2, as increases from 0 to cos−1(−1 ); 0 then decreases to 0 as

increases further to . In this case 0(0 0) is usually infinite at the maximum value

of 0, although this singularity gives a finite contribution to the total cross section; no

particles appear beyond the maximum 0 in the laboratory system.

A 6.3 Scattering by Spherically Symmetric Potentials

In this section, we assume that the potential is a function only of , and we find

the connection between the solution separated in spherical polar coordinate and the

asymptotic form.Asymptotic behaviors

The diff erential scattering cross section in the center-of-mass coordinate sys-

tem can be found from µ−~

2

2∇2 +

¶ =

where = 12(1 + 2) The scattering is determined by the asymptotic form of

in the region where = 0

= [ +1

( )] (6.1)

where = ~ and is the speed of the incident particle. The probability current

270

Page 287: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 287/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

density J is given by

J() =~

2

£Ψ

† (∇Ψ) − ¡∇Ψ†¢Ψ¤

The gradient operator can be expressed in polar coordinates as

∇ =

r+

1

θ +

1

sin

φ

Since the second and third terms are small when is large, the current for large is in

the radial direction and

=~

| ( )|2 2

The number of scattered particles entering the solid angle (or detector) per unit time

is

= 2

=~

| ( )|2

From the definition of the cross section, it follows

( ) = | ( )|2

Diff erential cross section

The asymptotic behavior of the wave function determines the diff erential

scattering cross section but cannot itself be found without solving the wave equation

271

Page 288: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 288/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

throughout all space. In the spherical polar coordinate,

−~ 2

2

⎡⎢⎢⎣

12

¡2

¢+ 12 sin

³

¡sin

¢+ 2

2

´⎤⎥⎥⎦ = ( − )

The radial and angular parts of the solution can be separated by taking

() = () ( )

where

( ) = (cos )

is the spherical harmonic. The problem now possesses symmetry about the polar axis,

so that , and are independent of the angle . That is, we just consider the

case of = 0. In the case the =0 is reduced to the Legendre polynomials. Thus,

the general solution can then be written as a sum of products of radial function and

Legendre polynomials,

=∞X=0

(2 + 1)() (cos )

=∞X=0

(2 + 1)−1() (cos )

where is the Legendre polynomial of order , and satisfies

22

+

∙2 − () − ( + 1)

2

¸ = 0

272

Page 289: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 289/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

where

=

µ2

~ 2

¶12

() =2 ()

~ 2→ 0 as → +∞

1

2

µ2

¶ =1

2

2

In the limit of → +∞ the solution is one of the form

∝ ± → sin( + 0)

In some specialized problems, () can be neglected for greater than some distance

, and may be small enough so that the term in not negligible. The general form

for () has the form

() = [cos () − sin ()]

−→

sin( −

2 + ) → ∞ (6.2)

Here is the spherical Bessel function;

() =

µ

2

¶12

+12()

→ 1

cos( − + 1

2) → ∞

(2 + 1)!! → 0

273

Page 290: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 290/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

is the spherical Neumann function;

() = (−1)+1

µ

2

¶12

−−12()

→ 1

sin( − + 1

2) → ∞

→ −(2 − 1)!!

+1

→0

To identify the form of , we require an expansion of cos in Legendre polynomials;

cos =∞X=0

(2 + 1) () (cos )

Comparison of Eq.(6.1) with the general form () gives

+ −1 ( )

=∞X=0

(2 + 1) () (cos ) + −1 ( )

=∞X=0

(2 + 1)()−1 sin( −

2+ ) (cos )

are the coefficient for diff erent , and should take the form

=

Thus it gives

() =1

2

∞X=0

(2 + 1)(2 − 1) (cos )

274

Page 291: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 291/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

Thus the diff erential cross section is

() = | ()|2

=1

2

¯¯ ∞X=0

(2 + 1)(2 − 1) (cos )

¯¯2

Total elastic cross section

The total elastic cross section is given by

= 2

Z 0

()sin

=4

2

∞X=0

(2 + 1) sin2

Here we make use of the orthogonality property of the Legendre polynomialsZ +1

−1

cos (cos ) 0(cos ) =2

2 + 1 0

The total cross section can also be related to (0). it follows from the generating

function for the Legendre polynomials that (1) = 1 for = 0 and all , so that

(0) =

1

2

∞X=0

(2 + 1) ¡2

− 1¢

Comparison with the total cross section shows

=2

[ (0) − ∗(0)] =

4

Im (0)

This relation is known as the optical theorem.

275

Page 292: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 292/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

The physical interpretation of the optical theorem is as follows: In order for

scattering to take place, particles must be removed in an amount proportional to

from the incident beam, so that its intensity is smaller behind the scattering region

( ≈ 0) than in front of it. This can occur only by the interference between two terms

in the asymptotic expression of the wave function.

Phase shifts

The angle is called the phase shift of the l partial wave, since according to

Eq.(6.2) it is the diff erence in phase between the asymptotic forms of the actual radial

function () and the radial function () in the absence of the scattering potential.

the phase shifts completely determine the scattering, and the scattering cross section

vanishes when each of is 0 or 180.

A 6.4 Applications

B 6.4.1 Scattering by a square well

In general, for a given potential, phase shifts are calculated from a numerical solution

of the radial equations. In a few cases an analytical solution is possible, in particular

for scattering by an attractive square well, for which the reduced potential () is

() =

⎧⎪⎪⎨

⎪⎪⎩

− 0( 0) ;

0

276

Page 293: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 293/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

Inside the well ( ) the radial equation is

∙2

2+

2

− ( + 1)

2+ 2

¸() = 0

where we set 2 = 2 + 0 The regular solution of this equation is

() = ()

In the exterior region the radial equation is

∙2

2+

2

− ( + 1)

2+ 2

¸() = 0

The general solution is

() = [ () − tan ()] (6.3)

The solutions for and can be joined smoothly at = by requiring that

() =

();

()

¯¯=

=

()

¯¯=

Eliminating the normalization constants gives

tan () = 0() () − () 0()

0() () − () 0()

At low energies, the scattering is dominated by the = 0 wave. Using the formula

0() =sin

0() = −cos

277

Page 294: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 294/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

we have

tan 0() = tan − tan

+ tan tan

In the low-energy limit, ¿ 1 tan ≈ , and

0() = −

µ1 − tan

Then the = 0 partial cross section is

=0 =4

2sin2 0

≈ 42

µ1 − tan

¶2

B 6.4.2 Scattering by a hard-sphere potential

Another simple, but interesting example is the hard-sphere potential

() =

⎧⎪⎪⎨⎪⎪⎩

+∞ ;

0

Since the scattered particle cannot penetrate into the region , the wave function in

the exterior region must vanish at = . Since the scattered particle cannot penetrate

into the region the wave function in the exterior region, given by Eq.(6.3), must

vanish at = , from which

tan () =()

()

278

Page 295: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 295/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

In the low-energy limit, ¿ 1

tan () =()

(2 + 1)!!

∙−(2 − 1)!!

()+1

¸

= − ()2+1

(2 + 1)!!(2 − 1)!!

Hence |tan ()| quickly decreases as increases. As a result, the low-energy scattering

is always dominated by the s-wave. Since 0() = sin and 0() = − cos , we

have

0 = −

So the cross section is

0

= 42

At high energies ( 0), we find

=

2−

so that

≈ 42

maxX=0

(2 + 1)sin2(22 − )

≈ 22

It is interesting to compare this result with that obtained from classical mechanics.

279

Page 296: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 296/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

B 6.4.3 Identical Particles and Scattering

Collisions between identical particles are particularly interesting as a direct illustration

of the fundamental diff erences between classical and quantum mechanics. In the polar

coordinate, the two directions are opposite, ( ) and ( − + )

The wave functions

() = · + ()

−() = −· + ( − )

Symmetric or anti-symmetric:

Ψ = () + −()

Ψ = () − −()

Classical case

The diff erential cross-section is

( ) = | ( )|2 + | (−

+ )|2

Scattering of two identical spinless bosons

The diff erential cross-section is

( ) = | ( ) + ( − + )|2

Scattering of two identical spin-1/2 fermions

280

Page 297: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 297/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

For spin 1/2 fermions, the wave functions contains two parts, spin and spatial

part. For spins, two spins can form one spin singlet = 0 (antisymmetric), and one

spin triplet = 1 (symmetric). The total wave function should be antisymmetric. Thus

one part of the wave function is symmetric and another part must be antisymmetric.

The diff erential cross-section is

( ) =1

4| ( ) + ( − + )|2

+3

4| ( ) − ( − + )|2

A 6.5 Applications to interactions with the classical

field

We apply the formalism of time dependent perturbation theory to the interactions of

atomic electrons with the classical radiation field.

B 6.5.1 Absorption and stimulation emission

Consider an electron in an electromagnetic field,

=1

2(p−

A)2 + ()

=1

2p2 + () −

A · p

281

Page 298: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 298/374

Page 299: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 299/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

The energy flux of an electromgnatic field is given by the Poynting vector,

=

4(E × H)

with E = −1

A and B = ∇ × A 122

|0|2

=~

→122

|0|2

=42~

2

(2

~ )¯h|

n·x−ε · p |i

¯2 ( − − ~ )

B 6.5.2 Electric dipole approximation

Assume ~ is of order of the atomic energy levels, so

~ ∼ 2

0 '

2

This leads to

= ∼ ~

2= 137

Then ∼ 137 ¿ 1 for light atams. In this case, it becomes a good approxi-

mations

n·x = 1 +

n · x + · · ·

h| n·x−ε · p |i → ε · h|p |i

Using the Heisenberg equation of motion,

[ 0] =~

283

Page 300: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 300/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

h|p |i =

~ h| [x 0] |i =

h| n·x−ε · p |i → ε · h|x |i

This is called the electric dipole approximation. In this approximation,

= 42 |h|x |i|2 ( − )

B 6.5.3 Photoelectric eff ect

The photoelectric eff ectis the ejection of an electro when the atom is placed in the

radiation field. The basic process is considered to be the transition from an atomic

bound state to a continuum state ( 0). Therefore, |i the ket for an atomic state,

say, the ground state of hydrogen atom, while |i is the ket for a continuum state say

a plane wave state |k i

The basic task in this calculation is the to calculate the number of the

final state near the energy and + , or the density of state

( ) = lim

→0

Consider a cubic box of side L3. The plane wave has the form,

hx|k i =k ·x

32

where

= 2

284

Page 301: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 301/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

The energy

=~ 22

2=~ 2(2)2

22(2 + 2

+ 2)

= 2Ω

= 2

Ω

( ) = 2

Ω

=

µ

2

¶3

~ 2 =

µ

2

¶3

~ 2(2~ 2)12

So the diff erential cross section becomes

=

42~

2 ¯hk |

n·x−

ε · p |i¯2 µ

2¶3

~ 2

The initial state is taken to be a ground state of hydrogen-like wave function except

that the Bohr radius 0 is replaced by 0 .

hk | n·x−ε · p |i =

Z x hk | i

n·x−ε · (−~ ∇) h |i

= ε · Z x−k ·x

32

n·x

(−~ ∇)"−

0 µ

0¶32#

In this integral, notice that ε · ∇n·x− = 0

hk | n·x−ε · p |i = −ε ·

Z x

−~ ∇−k ·x

32 n·x−

"−0

µ

0

¶32#

=

Z x~ (ε · k ) −k ·x

32n·x−

"−0

µ

0

¶32#

285

Page 302: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 302/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

For th hydrogen atom,

Ω

= 322 (ε · )

2

5

50

1

[(0)2 + 2]4

where q = k − ()n

A 6.6 Approximate Collision Theory

See Sakurai’s book: section 7.1, 7.2, and 7.3

B 6.6.1 The Lippman-Schwinger Equation

Let us begin with the time-independent formulation of scattering processes. The Hamil-

tonian is written as

= 0 + = 2

2+

0 stands for the kninetic energy. In the collision theory, the source of incident particles

and the detection location of the scattered particles are very far away from the scattering

center. 0 can describe the behaviors of incident and refl

ected particle very well as thepotential approaches to zero when the distance is much larger than the interaction

distance. We have two Schrodinger equations in the absence and presence of :

0 |i = |i

( 0 + ) |Ψi = |Ψi

286

Page 303: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 303/374

Page 304: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 304/374

Page 305: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 305/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 6.4:

In the last step we used the residue theorem:

I

− 0= 2

I () = 2

X−1 = 2 × (sum of enclosed residues).

The two pole points are

= ±√

2 + = ±( + )

The equation becomes

hx

¯Ψ

(+)

®= hx |i − 2

~ 2

Z 0

+|x−x0|

|x− x0|hx0|

¯Ψ

(+)

®

Assume that V is a local potential,

hx0| |x00i = (0) (x0−x00)

hx¯Ψ

(+)®

= hx |i − 2

~ 2

Z 0 +|x−x0|

|x− x0| (0) hx0

¯Ψ

(+)®

289

Page 306: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 306/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

As the observation point is far away from the scatterer,

|x| = À |x0| = 0

|x− x0| = (2 − 20 cos + 02)12

= (1

−0

cos + )

From this approximation and taking k0 = x |x| we have

+|x−x0|

|x− x0|≈

−k

0·r0

So,

hx ¯Ψ(+)® →hx |i

−2

~ 2

Z x0−k0·r0 (0) hx0 ¯Ψ(+)®

Comparing with the asymptotic form of the wave function,

hx¯Ψ

(±)® → 1

(2)32

∙k•r +

(k0k)

¸

We have

(k0k) = −42

~ 2Z x0

exp[−

k0 · x0]

(2)32 (x0) hx0| Ψ(+)®= −42

~ 2hk0|

¯Ψ

(+)®

From this result we have the diff erential cross section

Ω= | (k0k)|

2

290

Page 307: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 307/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

B 6.6.2 The Born Approximation

The formula contains the unknown wave function. We have to introduce the approxi-

mation.

¯Ψ

(+)

®= |i +

1

− 0 +

¯Ψ

(+)

®= |i +

1

− 0 + µ

|i +1

− 0 + ¯Ψ

(+)®¶

= |i +1

− 0 + |i +

Assume the eff ect of the scattering is not very strong, we replace hx0| Ψ(+)®

by hx0| i

in the integral,

hx0| Ψ(+)® → hx0| i = exp[−k · x0]

This is the first-order Born approximation. The amplitude is

(0 ) = −42

~ 21

(2)3

Z x0(k−k

0)•x0

(x0)

which is the Fourier transform of the potential except for a constant.

For a spherical symmetric potential, assume |k− k0| = = 2 sin 2 (|k| =

|k0| as the energy is conserved.)

= − 1

4

2

~ 2

Z 2

0

2

Z 2

0

Z 0

sin cos ()

= −2

~ 2

Z +∞

0

()sin

291

Page 308: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 308/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

B 6.6.3 The higher-order Born approximation

Define

¯Ψ

(+)®

= |i

we have

|i = ¯Ψ

(+)® = |i + 1 − 0 +

|i

= + 1

− 0 +

= + 1

− 0 +

+ 1

0 +

1

0 + + · · ·

The scattering amplitude can be written as

(k0k) = − 1

4

2

~ 2(2)3 hk| |k0i

B 6.6.4 Optical Theorem

Im ( = 0) = 4

where () = (kk) and =R Ω

Ω =R

| (k0k)|2 Ω

G Proof.

( = 0) = ( ) = − 1

4

2

~ 2(2)2 hk| |ki

292

Page 309: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 309/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

Im hk| |ki = Im-k| |Ψ(+)

®

= Im

∙µ-Ψ

(+)¯− -Ψ(+)

¯

1

− 0 −

¶ ¯Ψ

(+)®¸

Use the relation,

1

− 0

= 1

− 0

+ ( − 0)

Im hk| |ki = Im£− -Ψ(+)

¯ ( − 0)

¯Ψ

(+)®¤

= −-Ψ

(+)¯

( − 0) ¯Ψ

(+)®

=

− Z k0

-Ψ(+)¯ |k0i hk0| (

− 0) |k0i hk0| ¯Ψ(+)®

= −

Z k0-Ψ

(+)¯

|k0i hk0| ¯Ψ

(+)®

( − ~ 202

2)

= −

Z 020Ω0

(+)¯

|k0i hk0| ¯Ψ

(+)®

( − ~ 202

2)

= −

Z Ω0

(+)¯

|k0i hk0| ¯Ψ

(+)®

02 2

~ 21

20

At the last step we take 0 = p 2~ 2.

Im hk| |ki = −0

~ 2

Z Ω0

¯-Ψ

(+)¯

|k0i¯2

293

Page 310: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 310/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

B 6.6.5 Application: from Yukawa potential to Coloumb poten-

tial

As an illustration of the Born approximation, we consider the Yukawa potential

() = 0−

(k0k) = −Z

() sin

= − 0

1

2 + 2

where

= |k0 − k|

Z ()sin =

0 Z

+∞

0

− sin

= 0

Z +∞

0

− − −

2

= 02

µ1

− − 1

+

= 0

2 + 2

So the diff erential cross section is

() =

µ2 0

~

¶21

[22(1 − cos ) + 2]

When = 0, the Yukawa potential is reduced to the Coloumb potential, 0 → 02

We obtain

() =(2 02)

2

~ 41

164 sin4 2

=

µ 02

¶2

1

16sin4 2

294

Page 311: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 311/374

CHAPTER 6 – MANUSCRIPT

This is the Rutherford scattering cross section. From Rutherford formula we conclude

that the charge-charge interaction in atomic scale obey Coulomb law, i.e., 1. Actually

this formula does not contain the Planck constant, and can be drived from the classical

theory.

295

Page 312: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 312/374

CN Chapter 7

CT Selected Topics

A 7.1 Relativistic Quantum Mechanics

I shall briefly introduce the Dirac equation. Because of extensive interests in spintronics

and graphene, I shall focus on the spin-orbit coupling (electric manipulation of electron

spin) and graphene (2D massless Dirac particles)

B

7.1.1 The Schrodinger Equation

~ Ψ = Ψ

296

Page 313: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 313/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

where = 2

2+ .

→ → ~

→ −~ ∇

[ ] = ~

The continuity equation:

+ ∇ · = 0

where

= Ψ∗Ψ

= − ~

2(Ψ∗∇Ψ−Ψ∇Ψ∗) = Re(Ψ∗Ψ)

In special theory of relativity, Einstein’s relation between energy and mass

tells us that

2 = 24 + 2 2

In a similar way, we may have the Klein-Gorden Equation

−~ 2 2Ψ = (24 − 2~ 2∇2)Ψ

For a plane-wave solution,

Ψ = exp[( · − )~ ]

297

Page 314: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 314/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

= ±p

24 + 2 2

The continuity equation

+ ∇ · = 0

where

=

~

22 [Ψ∗ Ψ−Ψ Ψ∗]

= − ~

2(Ψ∗∇Ψ−Ψ∇Ψ∗)

Difficulties:

1. Negative energy

2. Negative probability

Spectrum of Hydrgen atom

( − ())2Ψ = (24 − 2~ 2∇2)Ψ

B 7.1.2 Dirac Equation

Dirac wrote a linear equation

= · + 2

and required that

2 = ( · + 2 )2

= 22 + 24

298

Page 315: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 315/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

As a result,

+ = 2

+ = 0

2 = 1

In 2D, we have

=

=

=

In 3D, Dirac realized that and should be at least 4×4 matrices. One representation

is

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ = ⊗

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

0 −

⎞⎟⎟⎠ = ⊗ (= 0 ⊗ )

In this way we have a linear Dirac equation,

~ Ψ = ( · + 2 )Ψ

299

Page 316: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 316/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Its Hermitian conjugate is

−~ Ψ† = Ψ

†(+~ ∇ · † + 2 †)

we have the continuity equation with

= Ψ†Ψ

= Ψ†Ψ

The velocity operator

=1

~ [ ] =

The plane wave solution

Ψ( ) = exp[( · − )~ ]

( · + 2 ) =

Since and are 4 × 4 matrices,

=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1

2

3

4

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

300

Page 317: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 317/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The Dirac equation is reduced into

( − 2)0 − · 0 = 0

− · 0 + ( + 2)0 = 0

The solution is

= p

2 2 + 24 = ±p

2 2 + 24

0 = ·

+ 20

and

+ = +⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

· √ 2 2+24+2

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

− = −

⎛⎜⎜⎝

·

−√ 2 2+24−2

0

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

The rest energy of electron 2 = 051099906MeV = 051 × 106The electron energy

in solids is at most about several eV it would be a good approximation in a non-

relativistic limit

+ = +

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

for the positive energy

301

Page 318: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 318/374

Page 319: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 319/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

B 7.1.4 The Zeeman coupling

Starting with an electron in an electromagnetic field,

[ · ( −

) + 2 + ]() = ()

Denote () =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

()

()

⎞⎟⎟⎠

( − − 2) = · ( −

)

( − + 2) = · ( −

)

( − − 2) = · ( −

)

1

− + 2 · ( −

)

In the non-relativistic limit,

= + 2

( − ) = · ( −

)

1

− + 22 · ( −

)

≈ 1

2

h · ( −

)i2

303

Page 320: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 320/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

( · A) ( · B) =X

=X

( + )

= A · B + · (A × B)

h · ( −

)i2

= ( −

)2 +

~

· (∇ × )

The final results

=

∙1

2( −

)2 + +

~

2 ·

¸

B 7.1.5 Exact solution in Coloumb potential: Hydrogen atom£ · + 2 + ()

¤ =

=2"

1 + 22

h+12+

√ ( +12)2− 22

i2

#12

where () = −2 and is the fine structure constant.

B 7.1.6 Spin-orbit coupling

Higher order approximation:

304

Page 321: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 321/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

( − ) = · ( −

)

1

− + 22 · ( −

)

( −

) = · (

)1

22

· (

)

( − ) =1

22 · ( −

)(1 − −

22) · ( −

)

=1

2

h · ( −

)i2

+1

422

h · ( −

)i

( − )h

· ( −

)i

h · ( −

)i2

= ( −

)2 +

~

· (∇ × )

h · ( −

)i

h

· ( −

)i

= ~ · (∇ × ) + · · ·

Final results

=

∙1

2( −

)2 + +

~

2 ·

¸

+~

422 · (∇ × p) + · · · · · ·

Spin-orbit coupling or L S coupling

305

Page 322: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 322/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

In a rotational invariant potential

=~

422 · (∇ × p)

=~

422

1

· (r × p) =

1

222

1

S · L

B 7.1.7 Spin-orbital coupling and spintronics

Spin-orbit coupling from the classic point of view

In a 2D plane with ∇ = − z

= ( × p) = ( − )

B 7.1.8 Spin transverse force

=1

~ [ ]

=

1

~ [ ]

B 7.1.9 Spin-orbit coupling and Datta-Das field-eff ect transistor

B 7.1.10 Graphene: 2D massless Dirac quasi-particles

Model for graphene: a monolayer of carbon atoms

306

Page 323: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 323/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

U s i n g S p i n - O

r b i t C o u p l i n g : s p i n F E T

V

Figure 7.1:

307

Page 324: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 324/374

Page 325: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 325/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 7.3:

309

Page 326: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 326/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 7.4:

310

Page 327: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 327/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 7.5:

311

Page 328: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 328/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

C Graphene and massless Dirac particles

Graphene–a monolayer of carbon atoms packed into a honeycomb lattice, is one of

the most intriguing systems in solid state physics today. The most popular description

of graphene band structure is the tight binding one, first done by Wallace. The band

structure exhibits very unique features: the first two bands do not have a gap between

them, and do not overlap either. In fact they intersect in two inequivalent points,

called Dirac points in the first BZ. resulting in four degenerate modes. The vicinity

of the dirac points is not parabolic (as in most crystals) but in fact conical. Hence,

the group velocity ≡ ∇kE ( ) is independent of the energy. The Fermi level for

undoped graphene lies exactly at the intersection points, and graphene is a gapless

semiconductor. Since the dispersion curve resembles that of ultra-relativeistic particles,

one can write a relativistic dynamic equation for the excitations. Such equation can be

derived from the tight binding model, and the resulting equations are infact the well

known Dirac equation for massless particles.

= √ 3

being the bond length. We shall took = 1, then

1 = (√

32 +12)

2 = (√

32 −12)

312

Page 329: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 329/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 7.6:

Unit cell area is: = 2 sin(3) =√

32.

Fig.: (a) Graphene hexagonal lattice constructed as a superposition of two

triangular lattices A and B , with basis vectors a for lattice A and vectors δ with

= 1 2 3 connecting A to B . (b) the green hexagon is a Brillouin zone (BZ) and pink

diamond is the extended BZ for the honeycomb lattice. The reciprocal lattice vectors

are b.

Reciprocal lattice:

1 = 22 ×

= 2(1

√ 3 1)

2 = 21 ×

= 2(1

√ 3 −1)

313

Page 330: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 330/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The tight binding Hamiltonian in the nearest neighbors approximation is

0 = −Xnδ

†nn+δ + †n+δ

n (7.1)

the hopping parameter, n,n+δ are annihilation operators corresponding A,B sub-

lattices, and suppressing the spin degree of freedom which is irrelevant for optics. The

above Hamiltonian can be written as

0 = −Xnδ

³†n †n+δ

´⎛⎜⎜⎝ 0 1

1 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠⎛⎜⎜⎝

n

n+δ

⎞⎟⎟⎠ (7.2)

It is possible to diagonalize the Hamiltonian at this point. However, one can

gain some more insight on the excitations in Fourier space. Expanding the operators

( 2

is the number of primitive unit cells, the lattice is × )

a =1

Xk

k·a(k) (7.3)

a+δ =1

Xk

k·(a+δ)(k) (7.4)

and plugging it into Eq. (7.1)

Xnδ

†n+δn = 1

2Xk

Xq

Xnδ

(k−q)·n−q·δ(q)†(k)

=Xk

(k)†(k)Xδ

−k·δ ≡Xk

(k)†(k)(k) (7.5)

Performing the summation and plugging the results into (7.1) we obtain

0 =

XkΦ

†(k)H0Φ(k) Φ†(k) =

¡(k)† (k)†

¢ (7.6)

314

Page 331: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 331/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

H0(k) =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 ∗(k)

(k) 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ (7.7)

where

(k) = −

√ 3 + 2−(2

√ 3) cos

µ

2

¶¸(7.8)

= −√ 3∙

1 + 2−

√ 3

2 cosµ

2

¶¸ (7.9)

Note that diagonalizing H0, also diagonalize 0. The energy bands are ob-

tained by the eigenvalues

E (k) = ± |(k)| = ±

v uut

1 + 4 cos2

µ

2

¶+ 4 cos

µ

2

¶cos

Ã√ 3

2

! (7.10)

which vanish at sixK points ±2(1√

3 13), ±2(0 23) and ±2(−1√

3 13).

One can show that these points are connected by reciprocal lattice vectors, and only

two are inequivalent, denoted by K+, K−. One can find the points by requiring = 0.

For this −√

32 must be real, so = 0. Then = 23.

Alternatively, −√

3 = −1, = ±2√

3 and = ±23.

Expanding E (k) around e.g. ±2(0 23) we get

= −√

32( ± ) (7.11)

Expanding E (k) around these points we obtain

E (p) = ±~ |p| =

√ 3

2~ (7.12)

315

Page 332: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 332/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

and p measured from the K± points.

One can cast the spectrum in the vicinity of the K± points in the manifestly

relativistic way. For this let us turn the coordinate axes by 90 so that → 0 and

→ −0. Then, Eq. 7.11 will look like

=−

32(−

0 ± 0) (7.13)

The Hamiltonian in the vicinity of K± then becomes

H0(K± + p) = −√

32

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 ± 0 + 0

± 0 − 0 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠ (7.14)

= (± 0 + 0) (7.15)

In the graphene, the eff ective velocity is about c/300 where c is the speed of light

C Solution in a magnetic field and quantum Hall eff ect

In a magnetic field, we introduce a vector potential = ( 0) such that

→~

→ −

→ −~

For ( + + )

( ) =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0 ~ −

+ ~

~ −

− ~ 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

316

Page 333: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 333/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The communtator

[~ −

+ ~ ~ −

− ~ ] = [−

−~ ] + [~ −

]

= −2~

= 2~ 22

0

=√ 2~

(~ −

+ ~ )

† =√ 2~

(~ −

− ~ )

( ) =√

2~

⎜⎜⎝0

0

⎟⎟⎠= 0

⎜⎜⎝0

0

⎟⎟⎠with [ †] = 1 In this way, the stationary Schrodinger equation is reduced to

0

⎛⎜⎜⎝

0

† 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠⎛⎜⎜⎝

⎞⎟⎟⎠ =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

⎞⎟⎟⎠

0 =

0† =

(0†)0 = (0†) = 2

(0)2 † = 2

† |i = |i

317

Page 334: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 334/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

= h|i

= 0

=0

h||i =

0

√ h|

−1i = h|

−1i

For = 0, =0 = 0.

B 7.1.11 Topological Insulator and Dirac particels

Certain insulators have exotic metallic states surrounding arround the boundary or

surfaces. These states are formed by the strong spin-orbital coupling as a result of

topological eff ect that the motion of electrons is insensitive to scattering of inpurities.

The electrons in the surface states are well described by an eff ective Hamiltonoan of

two-component massless Dirac particle.

= p · = ( + )

This system is diff erent from graphene: there are double spin degeneracy and double

valley degeneracy of Dirac cone in graphene. The surface states in topological insulator

is a single Dirac cone.

The topological insulator was predicted theoretically, and confirmed experi-

menatlly. Several families of topological insulator have been discovered. The materials

318

Page 335: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 335/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Figure 7.7:

may provide new route to generate novel particles and quantum states and to exploreapplication in spintronic device and quantum computing.

A 7.2 Quantum Statistics

Quantum statistical mechanics is the branch of physics dealing with systems in mixed

states; it is the quantum analogue of classical statistical mechanics. It should be noted

that statistics enters at two levels in quantum statistical mechanics: first, because of

the statistical interpretation of the wave function and second, because of our incomplete

knowledge of dynamical state of the system.

319

Page 336: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 336/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

B 7.2.1 Density Operator and Ensembles

Question: How to describe quantum mechanically an ensemble of physical systems

for which, say = 60 are characterized by |i and the remaining = 40 are

characterized by some other ket | i

Example: a general state for S=1/2 system

|i = + |+i + − |−i

which characterizes a state ket whose spin is pointing some definite direction. We

should not confuse the probability weight of the states |+i and |−i , ± and |±|2

Ensemble average and density operator.

Pure ensemble: |i

Mixed ensembles:

1

¯(1)

®2

¯(2)

®3

¯¯(3)

®.

..

.

..with the normalization condition

X

= 1

320

Page 337: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 337/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The ensemble average

hi =X

h || i

=X

X

h |i h| | i

= X |h|i|2

Alternatively,

hi =X

h|i h|i h || i

=X

h|X

|i h| |i

= ()

where

=X

|i h|

is the density matrix operator and is independent of representation.

Two properties:

(a). is Hermitian;

(b). satisfies the normalization condition.

() = 1

A pure ensemble: = 1 for some |i

= |i h|

321

Page 338: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 338/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

which is just a projection operator.

Several examples of density operator:

(1) A completely polarized beam with S+

= |+i h+| =

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1

0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

µ1 0

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1 0

0 0

⎞⎟⎟⎠

(2) A completely polarized beam with S+

= | +i h +|

=1

212(|+i + |−i)

1212

(h+| + h−|)

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

12

12

12

12

⎞⎟⎟⎠

(3) A partially polarized beam with 75 S+ and 25 S+

= 075 |+i h+| + 025 | +i h +|

=1

8

⎛⎜⎜⎝

7 1

1 1

⎞⎟⎟⎠

B 7.2.2 Quantum Statistical Mechanism

Order and Disorder

322

Page 339: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 339/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The density matrix of a pure ensemble

=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

0

. . .

1

. . .

0

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

The density matrix of a completely random ensemble

=

⎛⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎝

1

1

. . .

1

⎞⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎠

We define a quantity

= − ( ln )

= −X ln

For a pure ensemble

= 0

For a completely random ensemble

= ln

323

Page 340: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 340/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

This quantity is related to the entropy in thermodynamics,

= ( ln )

where k is the Boltzmann constant.

Basic assumption: Nature tends to maximize subject to the constraint that

the ensemble average of the Hamiltonian has a certain value.

To minimize :

= 0

i.e.,

(ln + 1) = 0

with the conditions

(a). h i = = ( )

(b). = 1

we obtain

[(ln + 1) + + ] = 0

= − −

=1P

− −

324

Page 341: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 341/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The partition function:

=X

= (− )

Thus the density matrix operator is

=1

The parameter is related to the temperature T as follows

= 1

Example: Spin-1/2 particle in a magnetic field

Consider a spin-1/2 particle having a magnetic momentum

= −~

subjected to a constant magnetic field along the z-axis.

= 2 =

The density operator

=1

=

⎛⎜⎜⎝

1

− 0

0 1

+

⎞⎟⎟⎠

325

Page 342: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 342/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

where

= − +

The average value of the z-component of spin at the temperature T is

h i =~

2

− −

− +

= −~ 2

tanh()

B 7.2.3 Quantum Statistics

Consider a system with two identical particles. Each particle has three non-degenerate

states: |1i |2i |3i with E1, E2, E3 . For classical identical particles: there 9 possible

configurations

|1 1i |1 2i |1 3i

|2 1i |2 2i |2 3i

|3 1i |3 2i |3 3i

The wave function is

Φ = Φ (1)Φ (2)

326

Page 343: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 343/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

For bosons: there are 6 possible configurations

|1 1i |2 2i |3 3i

(|1 2i + |2 1i) 212

(|1 3i + |3 1i) 212

(|3 2i + |2 3i) 212

The wave function

Φ = Φ (1)Φ (2) +Φ(1)Φ (2)

For fermions: there are 3 possible configurations

(|1 2i − |2 1i) 212

(|1 3i − |3 1i) 212

(|3 2i − |2 3i) 212

The wave function

Φ = Φ (1)Φ (2) −Φ(1)Φ (2)

B 7.2.4 Systems of non-interaction particles

We shall now discuss the properties of systems of large numbers of non-interacting

objects which are equivalent and possess the same energy levels.

327

Page 344: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 344/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

C Maxwell-Boltzmann Statistics

(Classical identical particles)

If E (j=1, 2, · · · ) denotes an energy level of one of the particles, the total

energy of the system E can be written

= X

where the sum runs over all the eigenenergies of a single particle, and where n is the

number of particles with the energy E . The total number of particles is

=X

In a Maxwell-Boltzmann system, any number of particles can be in each level, so that

nj can either be zero or any positive integer. If all the energies Ej are diff erent, each

permutation of the particles results in a diff erent wave function, thus each energy level

of the total system is N!-fold degenerate. However if nj1, the interchange between

these particles do not alter the wave function. Thus the number of distinct states

corresponding to a given value of the total energy of the system is

= !Q !

328

Page 345: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 345/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The partition function can be expressed as

=X

exp(− X

)

=X

!Q !

exp(− X

)

="X

exp(− )#2

The average distribution is

hi =1

X

exp(− X

)

=

− ln

=

− = − −

C Bose-Einstein Statistics (for bosons)

The wave function of many bosons is symmetric and the energy level of the system is

non-degenerate

= 1 for any

Here we use the grand canonical ensemble ( → +∞)

hi =1

X

exp(− X

− X

)

329

Page 346: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 346/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

where

=X

exp(− X

− X

)

=Y

⎛⎝X

exp(− − )

⎞⎠

=Y

(1 − exp(− − ))−1

In the case,

h i = − ln

=1

exp( + )

−1

C Fermi-Dirac Statistics (for fermions)

The wave function of many bosons is antisymmetric, and the energy level of the system

is non-degenerate

= 1 for = 1 or 0

= 0 otherwise.

Here we use the grand canonical ensemble ( → +∞)

hi =1

X

exp(− X

− X

)

330

Page 347: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 347/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

where

=X

exp(− X

− X

)

=Y

⎛⎝ 1X=0

exp(− − )

⎞⎠

=Y

(1 + exp(− − ))

In the case,

h i = − ln

=1

exp( + ) + 1

B 7.2.5 Bose-Einstein Condensation

One of the main features of boson system is that bosons tend to occupy the lowest energy

state at low temperatures. At high temperatures, both distribution laws for bosons and

for fermions become equal to that for the Maxwell-Boltzmann case approximately. The

density of particles on a certain state always tends to be zero. For a boson system, as

h i =1

exp( + ) − 1→ +∞

if both E and are equal to zero, the density of the particle at E=0 can be nonzero in

the high density limit at low temperatures.

331

Page 348: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 348/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Consider a non-interacting boson gas in a three-dimensional system. The

spectrum of energy is

=~ 2

22

The density of particle is

= 0 +1

(2)3 Z 3( )

where 0 is the density of particles in the lowest energy state.

1

(2)3

Z 3( ) =

Z ( )( )

where

( ) =1

42 µ

2

~ 2 ¶32

12

This is the density of state at E.

− 0 =1

42

µ2

~ 2

¶32 Z +∞

0

12

+ − 1

=1

42

µ2

~ 2

¶32

12()

where

12() =

Z +∞

0

12

+ − 1

Since ≥ 0 the largest possible values of 12() occurs when = 0 and numerically

12( = 0) = 2315

332

Page 349: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 349/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

It follows;; that at 0 where

0 =~ 2

2

µ42

2315

¶23

the function ( − 0) becomes less than unit, and the system increasingly condensed

into the lowest energy state.

Bose-Einstein condensation was predicted by Albert Einstein and Satyendra

Nath Bose at 1924 to 25. It was first observed in Helium-4 liquid. Recent years it was

observed in some systems with cooling atoms. It is one of the most active branches in

condensed matter physics. If you are interested in the recent development in this field,

please visit Web site:

http://www.aip.org/pt/webwatch/ww9703.html.

B 7.2.6 Free fermion gas

The free particle Schrodinger equation in three dimensions is

− ~ 2

2 µ 2

2+

2

2+

2

2¶Ψ() = Ψ()

333

Page 350: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 350/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

If the particle are confined to a cube of edge L and we require the wave function to be

periodic in x, y, z direction with L, i.e.,

Ψ( + ) = Ψ( + )

Ψ( + ) = Ψ( + )

Ψ( + ) = Ψ( + )

the wave functions are

Ψ() =1

(2)32·

provided that the components of the wave vector k satisfies

= 0 ±2

±4

±6

· · ·

Any component of k is of the form 2n, where n is a positive integer. The energy

spectrum with n is

=~ 2

2

¡2 + 2

+ 2

¢As two indistinguishable fermions cannot have all their quantum numbers identical,

each energy level (or state) can be occupied by at most one particle. Thus we start

filling the energy level from that with the lowest energy (i.e., k=0 here) until all N

particles are accommodated.

The occupied energy levels may be represented as points inside a sphere in the

k-space. The energy at the surface of the sphere is the Fermi energy; the wave vectors

334

Page 351: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 351/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

at the Fermi surface have a magnitude k such that

=~ 2

22

The total number of energy levels inside the sphere is

=1

(2)3

4

3

3

Then

62 ¢13

In short, a boson gas condensates into the lowest energy state, and a fermion

gas forms a Fermi sphere in the k-space at absolute zero temperature.

A 7.3 Quantum Hall Eff ect

The quantum Hall eff ect is a remarkable phenomenon discovered experimentally in

1980s in which the Hall conductivity of a two-dimensional system of electrons is found

to have plateaus as a function of variables which determine the number of electrons

participating in the eff ect. The integer quantum Hall eff ect was observed by von Klitzing

et al in 1980. Simple theory suggests that the Hall conductivity at he plateaus should

be an integral multiple of 2~ and the experiments agree with that prediction to within

an accuracy of nearly 0.1 ppm. An application of great importance is to metrology, the

quantum Hall eff ect promises a method of providing very precise resistance standards

335

Page 352: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 352/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

that are insensitive to the particular sample and the details of its fabrication. With

a more powerful magnetic field and lower temperature, Daniel C. Tsui and Horst L.

Stormer discovered that the plateaus of the conductivity is a fractional multiples of the

basic unit 2~ Within a year of their discovery, Rovert B. Laughlin has succeeded in

explaining their result. Through theoretical analysis he showed that the electrons in a

powerful magnetic field can condense to form a kind of quantum fluid related to the

quantum fluids that occur in superconductivity and in liquid helium.

What makes these fluids particularly important for researchers is that events

in a drop of quantum fluid can aff ord more profound insights into the general inner

structure and dynamics of matter. The Royal Swedish Academy of Sciences awarded

The 1998 Nobel Prize in Physics jointly to Tsui, Stomer and Laughlin “for their dis-

covery of a new form of quantum fluid with fractionally charged excitations.”

B 7.3.1 Hall Eff ect

The Hall eff ect occurs when the charge carriers moving through a material experience a

deflection because of an applied magnetic field. This deflection results in a measurable

potential diff erence across the side of the material which is transverse to the magnetic

field and current direction.

336

Page 353: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 353/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

In Figure, a voltage V drives a current I in the positive X direction. Normal

Ohmic resistance is V/I . A magnetic field tin the positive z direction shifts positive

charge carriers in the negative y direction. This generates a Hall potential ( ) inthe y direction.

Quantitatively, Hall eff ect indicates that a transverse electric field will be

produced. Charges will accumulate on the transverse edges until a strong enough

electric field is developed to force remaining charges to continue undeflected. The

condition is

=

The drift velocity is given by

= =

337

Page 354: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 354/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

where n is the density of charge carrier. The electric field is

=

where l is the thickness of material and d the width. Hence we obtain an expression

for the density of charge carriers in a substance

=

·

1

=

Therefore this eff ect can be used to determine the density of charge carriers in conduc-

tors and semi-conductors, and has become a standard tool in physics laboratories over

all the world. The Hall conductivity

=

=

B 7.3.2 Quantum Hall Eff ect

In 1980 the German physicist Klaus von Klitzing discovered in a similar experiment that

the Hall resistance does not vary in linear fashion, but ”step-wise” with the strength

of the magnetic field. The steps occur at resistance values that do not depend on

the properties of the material but are given by a combination of fundamental physical

constants divided by an integer. We say that the resistance is quantized. At quantized

Hall resistance values, normal Ohmic resistance disappears and the material becomes

338

Page 355: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 355/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

in a sense superconducting. For his discovery of what is termed the integer quantum

Hall eff ect von Klitzing was awarded the Nobel Prize in 1985.

In their refined experimental studies of the quantum Hall eff ect, using among

other things lower temperatures and more powerful magnetic field, Stomer, Tsui and

their co-workers found to their great surprise a new step in the Hall resistance which

was three times higher than von Klitzing’s highest. They subsequently found more and

more new steps, both above and between the integers. All the new step heights can be

expressed with the same constant as earlier but now divided by diff erent fractions. For

this reason the new discovery is named the fractional quantum Hall eff ect..

339

Page 356: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 356/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

B 7.3.3 Laughlin’s Theory

A year after the discovery of the fractional quantum Hall eff ect, Laughlin off ered a

theoretical explanation. According to his theory the low temperature and the powerful

magnetic field compel the electron gas to condense to form a new type of quantum fluid.

Since electrons are most reluctant to condense (They are what is termed fermions) they

first, in a sense, combine with the ”flux quanta” of magnetic field. Particularly for the

first step ( = 13) discovered by Stomer and Tsui, each of electrons captures three

flux quanta thus forming a kind of composite particle with no objection to condensing.

(They become what is termed bosons). Quantum fluids have earlier occurred at very

340

Page 357: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 357/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

low temperatures in liquid helium and in superconductors. They have certain properties

in common, e.g. superfluidity, but they also show important diff erences in behaviors.

Apart from its superfluidity which explains the disappearance of Ohmic resistance at the

Hall resistance steps„ the new quantum fluid proposed by Laughlin has many unusual

properties. One of the most remarkable is that if one electron is added the fluid will

be aff ected (excited) and a number of fractionally charged “quasiparticles” created.

These quasiparticles are not particles in the normal sense but a result of the common

dance of electrons in the quantum fluid. Laughlin was the first to demonstrate that

the quasiparticles have precisely the correct fractional charge to explain the fractional

quantum Hall eff ect. Subsequent measurements have demonstrated more and more

fractional charged steps in the Hall eff ect, and Laughlin’s quantum fluid has proved

capable of explaining all the steps experimentally. The new quantum fluid strongly

resists compression; it is said to be incompressible.

Further reading

1. B. Davis, Splitting the electron , New Scientist, 31 Jan, 1998, p36

2. G. P. Collins, Fractionally charged quasiparticles signal their presence with

noise , Physics Today, Nov,1997, p17,

3. S. Kivelson, D. H. Lee and S. C. Zhang, Electrons in fl atband , Scientific

American, March,1996, p64.

341

Page 358: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 358/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

B 7.3.4 Charged particle in the presence of a magnetic field

We consider a charged particle moving on a plane in the presence of a perpendicular

uniform magnetic field B. The mass of the particle is M and charge e. The Hamiltonian

is

=1

2( +

)2

=1

2[(−~

+

)2 + (−~

+

)2]

The vector potential A, is such that its curl is equal to B:

= (∇ × A)

We will work in the isotropic gauge

A = −1

2B × r

i.e.

= −1

2

=12

In the gauge

=1

2(−~

2)2

+1

2(−~

+

2)2

342

Page 359: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 359/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Denote

Π = −~

2

Π = −~

+

2

The commutator is constant,

[ΠΠ] = −~

The Hamiltonian is expressed as

=1

2(Π − Π)(Π +Π) + [ΠΠ]

=1

2

[(Π

−Π)(Π +Π) +

~

= ~

[+ +

1

2]

where

+ =³

2~

´12

(Π − Π)

= ³

2~ ´12

(−~

+

2 − ~

+

2 )

= 212(−

+

1

4)

= 212(+

+

1

4)

where = ( + )0 and = ( − )0 The length unit 0 = (~ )12

343

Page 360: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 360/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

Hence the Hamiltonian is reduced to

= ~ (+ +1

2)

where

=

and +satisfy [ +] = 1

Comparing to the simple harmonic oscillator„ the motion of a charged particle

in a uniform magnetic field is equivalent to it. A set of the wave function has the form

( ) = −4

The energy eigenvalue is

= ~ ( +1

2)

The wave functions are also eigenstates of angular momentum operator

= −~ (

)

= ~ (

)

with the eigenvalue

( ) = ~ ( )

The energy level is called Landau level

344

Page 361: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 361/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The Landau levels have a huge degeneracy which is determined by

=

0

=

2 ~

=

220

To make this degeneracy more apparent, we assume the system has the shape of a

square with dimension L. We introduce another pair of operators

+ = 212(

− 14

)

= 212(−

− 1

4)

([ +] = 1)

The two operators commute with H,

[ ] = [+ ] = 0

Also , the operator annihilates the wave function ( ), just like the operator

( ) = 0

Define

= exp[20]

= exp[20†]

Thus, is an engenstate of

=

345

Page 362: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 362/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

A complete set of eigenstates of the Landau level can be constructed ( =

1 )

( ) = ( )

= exp[20] ( )

From the definitions of and

= exp[20 20†]

= exp[2 ]

Therefore the states ( ) have

() = ~ ( +1

2) ( )

() = exp[2 ] ( )

B 7.3.5 Landau Level and Quantum Hall Eff ect

The degeneracy of the Landau energy levels is −fold. The ratio of the number of

electrons to

=

is called the filling number of Landau level. When = 1it means that the first Landau

level is fully filled and when = 2, the second landau level is also filled. There is a

346

Page 363: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 363/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

simple relation between the filling number and the quantized Hall conductivity. Suppose

the total charge of the sample is

=

The current J is then equal to

J =

is determined by the magnetic field B and electric field E

=

So the current density j = J

=

=

=

· ~ =

2

~

The Hall conductance is

= 2

~

The integer quantum Hall eff ect occurs at = , (1,2,...) and the

fractional Hall eff ect occurs at = : 1/3, 1/5, 2/3, ...

A 7.4 Quantum Magnetism

Magnetism is inseparable from quantum mechanics, for a strictly classical system in

thermal equilibrium can display no magnetic momentum, even in a magnetic field. The

347

Page 364: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 364/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

magnetic momentum of a free atom has three principal sources: the spin with which

electrons are endowed, their orbital angular momentum about the nucleus; and the

change in the orbital moment induced by an applied magnetic field.

Ordered arrangements of electron spins

348

Page 365: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 365/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

B 7.4.1 Spin Exchange

Ferromagnetism is obtained in solids when the magnetic moments of many electrons

align. Antiferromagnetism and spin density waves describe oscillatory ordering of mag-

netic moments. The classical dipolar interaction between the electron moments (which

is of order 105 ) is for too weak to explain the observed magnetic transition temper-

ature (which are of order 102 − 103 0 in transition metal and rare earth compounds)

The coupling mechanism that gives rise to magnetism derives from the fol-

lowing fundamental properties of electrons:

• The electron’s spin

• The electron’s kinetic energy

• Pauli exclusion principle

• Coulomb repulsion

Before we introduce the physical origin of the magnetic coupling between

electrons in solids, we simply review some standard definitions and basic relations of

second quantization.

For an orthonormal single-particle basis, |i

-|

®=

349

Page 366: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 366/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The creation operator of state is † and its Hermitian conjugate is annihilation oper-

ator Both are defined with respect to the vacuum state |0isuch that

|i = † |0i

|0i = 0

The number operator is defined as

= †

For bosons,

h †

i = †

−†

=

= 0

For electrons with spin = 12, we have to introduce a pair of operators, † where

=↑ ↓ such that

=

= 0

350

Page 367: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 367/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The spin operator can be expressed as

† = + = ~ †↑↓

− = − = ~ †↓↑

=~

2

(†↑↑ −

†↓↓)

The commutation relations:

[ † − ] = 2~

[ ± ] = ±~ ±

B 7.4.2 Two-Site Problem

The Hersenberg spin exchange interaction is written as

= S1 · S2

To obtain the eigenstates of H, we check the following relations,

(1) [S21 ] = 0but [S1 ] 6= 0

(2) [S22 ] = 0but [S2 ] 6= 0

(3) [S1 + S2 ] = 0

Therefore S21 S2

2and S2 = (S1 + S2)2 and its z-component S are good

quantum numbers, but 1 2 are not. Hence we can denote the simultaneous eigenkets

351

Page 368: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 368/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

of S2 S

S

21 and S2

2 by

| 1 2i

such that

S21 | 1 2i

= 1( 1 + 1) | 1 2i

S22 | 1 2i

= 2( 2 + 1) | 1 2i

S1 | 1 2i

= ( + 1) | 1 2i

S1 | 1 2i

= | 1 2i

Fortunately, the state kets are also the eigenkets of H:

| 1 2i = | 1 2i

where

=

2[ ( + 1) − 1( 1 + 1) − 2( 2 + 1)]

352

Page 369: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 369/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

and

= | 1 − 2| | 1 − 2| + 1 1 + 2

Since the energy eigenvalues are independent of can be − the energy

eigenstates are (2 + 1)−fold degenerated. From the point of view of symmetry,

the degeneracy of the eigenstates originates from the invariance of H under the (2)

symmetry rotation,

† =

where

= exp[−S · n~ ]

The ground state:

The lowest energy state is determined by the sign of J: when 0

should be taken to be minimum, otherwise should be taken to be maximal.

The case of 0 :

= 1 − 2 ( 1 2)

The two spins are antiparallel, which is called antiferromagnetic. The ground state

energy

= − ( 1 + 1) 2

The case of 0

= 1 + 2

353

Page 370: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 370/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

The two spins are parallel, which is ferromagnetic

= − | | 1 2

B 7.4.3 Ferromagnetic Exchange ( 0)

Ferromagnetic exchange coupling originates from the direct Coulomb interaction and

the Pauli exclusion principle. In the second quantized form, the two-body Coulomb

interaction is given by

=1

2

Z ( )Ψ†

()Ψ†0()Ψ0()Ψ()

The field operator

Ψ†() = X

∗ ()†

The interaction can be expressed as

=1

2

Z ( )

׆()†

()()()†† 00

=X

+X0

0(↑ + ↓)(0↑ + 0↓)

+X0

0†

†0000

+ · · ·

354

Page 371: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 371/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

where

0 =1

2

Z |()|2 |0()|2 ( )

0 =1

2

Z ( )†

0()†()0()()

The exchange interaction acts as a Hersenberg interaction:

0X

+

+0000 = −2 0

X( · 0 +

1

4 · 0)

The positivity of 0 can be proved as follows:

(1) Complete screening:

= ( − )

In the case,

0 =1

2

Z |()|2 |0()|2 0

(2) Long-ranged Coulomb interaction

=2

| − |

Assume is the plane wave

0 ∝Z

exp[ · ]2

||

= 42

2 0

This is ferromagnetic!

355

Page 372: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 372/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

B 7.4.4 Antiferromagnetic Exchange

C Two-site (or atom) problem with two electrons

Let’s consider two orthogonal orbitals localized on two atoms labelled by = 1 2.

Tunnelling between the two atoms (or states) is described by a hopping Hamiltonian

= −X

( +1 2 + +2 1)

For simplicity, we consider an on-site interaction

= X

↑ · ↓

To explore the physical origin of anti-ferromagnetic coupling, we consider a special case:

. In the case, we choose to be the zero-order(or unperturbed) Hamiltonian

and + to be the perturbation.

For : there are six possible configurations which are eigenstates of H

(1) = 0, |1 ↑ 2 ↑i |1 ↑ 2 ↓i |1 ↓ 2 ↑i |1 ↓ 2 ↓i ;

(2) = , |1 ↑ 1 ↓i |2 ↓ 2 ↑i

Denote |i the unperturbed state with energy 0 and |i denote the two state

with E=U (n=1,2). In terms of the c-operators,

|i = +1

+2 |0i

356

Page 373: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 373/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

and

|1i = †1↑ †1↓ |0i

|2i = †2↑ †2↓ |0i

In the first-order perturbation theory

h | | 0i = 0

In the second-order perturbation theory

-¯∆ (2)

¯®

=P=12

h | | i h | | i

h | | i − h | | i

= − 1 X -

¯ ¯® - ¯ ¯®|i h| is a projection operator

|1i h1| = 1↑1↓(1 − 2↑)(1 − 2↓)(↑↓ −)

|2i h2| = (1 − 1↑)(1 − 1↓)2↑2↓(− ↑↓)

357

Page 374: Quantum Lecture Notes

8/8/2019 Quantum Lecture Notes

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/quantum-lecture-notes 374/374

CHAPTER 7 – MANUSCRIPT

-¯ ¯

1® -

1¯ ¯

= h| ( †2↑ 1↑ + †2↓ 1↓ + ~ )

×1↑1↓(1 − 2↑)(1 − 2↓)

( †2↑ 1

↑+ †2

↓ 1

↓+ ~ ) |0i

= h| ( †2↑ 1↑ + †2↓ 1↓)1↑1↓(1 − 2↑)(1 − 2↓)

×( †1↑ 2↑ + †1↓ 2↓) |0i

= h| (− †1↓ 1↑ †2↑ 1↓ − †1↑ 1↓ †2↓ 2↑) + 1↑2↓

+1↓2↑) |0i

= h| − 2 1 · 2 +1

2(1↑ + 1↓)(2↑ + 2↓) |0i

Therefore the eff ective Hamiltonian ∆ (2) can be written as an isotropic antiferromag-

netic Hersenberg spin exchange form.

∆ (2) = +42

( 1 · 2 − 1

4)

As 42 0, the exchange coupling is antiferromagnetic! The ground state of this

two-site problem is spin singlet, i.e. = 0. Our discussion on the two-site problem

can be easily generalized to a many-site system. The Hersenberg model is defined on a


Recommended